Element Traction Elevator Control, 42-02

Add to my manuals
192 Pages

advertisement

Element Traction Elevator Control, 42-02 | Manualzz

Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

11380 White Rock Road

Rancho Cordova, CA 95742 voice 916 463 9200 fax 916 463 9201 nidec-mce.com

Element Series

TM

Element Traction

TM

Elevator Control

Manual # 42-02-2P26, Rev A3, September 2015

Copyright

© 2015, Motion Control Engineering. All Rights Reserved.

This document may not be reproduced, electronically or mechanically, in whole or in part, without written permission from Motion Control Engineering.

Trademarks

All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property of the respective owners.

Warning and Disclaimer

Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible,

Motion Control Engineering and the document authors, publishers, distributors, and representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions. Information contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service, equipment, or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors, publishers, distributors, or representatives.

Limited Warranty

Motion Control Engineering (manufacturer) warrants its products for a period of 15 months from the date of shipment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials. Any defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear. Manufacturer, however, assumes no risk or liability for results of the use of the products purchased from it, including, but without limiting the generality of the forgoing: (1) The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, systems, assemblies or any other material or equipment (2) Unsuitability of this product for use in any circuit, assembly or environment. Purchasers’ rights under this warranty shall consist solely of requiring the manufacturer to repair, or in manufacturer's sole discretion, replace free of charge,

F.O.B. factory, any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and determined by manufacturer to be defective. The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon the manufacturer. This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and the exclusive liability of the manufacturer, AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS, FOR PURPOSE SOLD,

DESCRIPTION, QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER. In no event will the manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performance of this warranty.

Products that are not manufactured by MCE (such as drives, CRTs, modems, printers, etc.) are not covered under the above warranty terms. MCE, however, extends the same warranty terms that the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product (refer to the warranty terms for such products in their respective manual).

End User License Agreement

This End User License Agreement (“Agreement”) grants you the right to use the software contained in this product (the “Software”) subject to the following restrictions: You may not: (i) copy the Software, except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures; (ii) transfer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product; (iii) modify, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software; (iv) export the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and foreign export laws and regulations; and (v) use the Software other than in connection with operation of the product.

“LICENSOR'S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY,

ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH

SUPPLIERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGE-

MENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.”

Important Precautions and Useful Information

This preface contains information that will help you understand and safely maintain MCE equipment. We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before installing, adjusting, or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment. This preface discusses:

• Safety and Other Symbol Meanings

• Safety Precautions

• Environmental Considerations

• In this manual

Safety and Other Symbol Meanings

Danger

This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if not done properly, might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage.

Caution

This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures, instructions, or situations which, if not done properly, might result in equipment damage.

Note

This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful information.

Safety Precautions

Danger

This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17.1, National Electrical Code, CE, and CAN/

CSA-B44.1/ASME-A17.5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all local codes and is installed in a safe manner.

This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 volts maximum. The three-phase AC power supply to the Drive Isolation

Transformer used with this equipment must originate from a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker sized in conformance to all applicable national, state, and local electrical codes in order to provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the Drive Unit and motor. Incorrect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition.

Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation. Bring your ground wire to the system subplate. You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground by using the shortest possible routing. See National Electrical Code Article 250 or the applicable local electrical code.

Before applying power to the controller, physically check all the power resistors and other components located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller. Components loosened during shipment may cause damage.

For proper operation of the AC Drive Unit in your controller, you must make sure that: 1) A direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and motor. Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise, thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building. Improper grounding may also render any RFI filter ineffective. 2) The incoming power to the controller and the outgoing power wires to the motor are in their respective, separate, grounded conduits.

This equipment may contain voltages as high as 1000 volts. Use extreme caution. Do not touch any components, resistors, circuit boards, power devices, or electrical connections without ensuring that high voltage is not present.

Environmental Considerations

• Keep the machine room clean.

• Controllers are generally in NEMA 1 enclosures.

• Do not install the controller in a dusty area.

• Do not install the controller in a carpeted area.

• Keep room temperature between 32 and 104° F (0 to 40° C).

• Prevent condensation on the equipment.

• Do not install the controller in a hazardous location or where excessive amounts of vapors or chemical fumes may be present.

• Make certain that power line fluctuations are within plus or minus 10% of proper value.

Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets

If your control or group enclosure is equipped with an air conditioning unit, it is very important to observe the following precautions. (Failure to do so can result in moisture damage to electrical components.)

• Maintain the integrity of the cabinet by using sealed knockouts and sealing any holes made during installation.

• Do not run the air conditioning while the cabinet doors are open.

• If you turn the air conditioner off while it is running, wait at least five minutes before restarting it. Otherwise, the compressor may be damaged.

• Observe the recommended thermostat setting (75 degrees) and follow recommended maintenance schedules.

• Make certain that the air conditioning drain tube remains clear to avoid water accumulation in the unit.

In This Manual:

This is the installation, adjustment, and troubleshooting guide for the Element traction controller. When viewed online as a pdf file, hyperlinks (buttons or blue text) link to related topics and informational websites. The manual includes:

Contents

: Table of Contents. When viewed online as a pdf file, hyperlinks in the Contents link to the associated topic in the body of the manual.

Section 1 . Installation

Section 2 . Configuration and Troubleshooting

• Section 3

. Maintenance Plan Information

Index : Alphabetical index to help you find information in the manual. When viewed

online as a pdf file, index entry page references are hyperlinks to the associated information in the body of the manual.

Contents

1. Installation

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Element Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Equipment Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Operating Mode Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Non-Automatic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Cartop Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Car Panel Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Hoistway Access Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Machine Room Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Construction Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Attended Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Independent Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Fire Service Phase II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Automatic Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Passenger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Capture for Test (Pretest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Emergency Modes of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Fire Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Earthquake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Pit Flood Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Emergency Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Emergency Dispatch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Learn Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Landing System Learn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Terminal Switch Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Mode of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Faults and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13

Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Enclosure Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Check for Shorts to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

i

AC Power, Motor, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Wire Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Initial Power Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Machine Room Construction Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Construction Run: Cartop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Required Drive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Magnetek HPV900 Series 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

KEB F5, v3.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Full Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Required Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Brake Pick/Hold Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Brake Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Brake Transformer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Initial Speed Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Magnetek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

KEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

LS-EDGE Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Tape Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Top and Bottom Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

LS-EDGE Broken Tape Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Tape Hanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Tape Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Sensor Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Door Zone Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Top Terminal & ETS Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

Bottom Terminal & ETS Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Hoistway Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Permanent Magnet Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

LS-RAIL Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Hoistway Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Serial Hall and Car Call Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

Hall Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

General Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

Serial Car Call Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

Lanterns and PIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44

Door Position Monitor Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

Load Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44

ii Manual # 42-02-2P26 9/9/15

Traction Elevator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45

Counterweight Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45

Brake Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45

Landing System Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Drive Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

S-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

One Floor Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Contract Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Relevel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Terminal Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Terminal Switch Learn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51

Adjustment Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51

Performance and Ride Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

Speed Changes Felt Excessively in Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Car Overshoots or Motor Overload/Overvolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Car Oscillates at Contract Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Power Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Traction Acceptance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Manual Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Safety String Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

SAFH Safety String Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

SAFC Safety String Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Motor Contactor Proofing Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Car Stopped at Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Car in Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Brake Contactor Proofing Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Car Stopped at Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Car in Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Ascending Car Overspeed Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion, Rope Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Automated Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Car/cwt safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

Car/cwt buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Electrical governor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Inspection overspeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Contract overspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

Switch Overspeed Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60

iii

Section 2. Configuration and Troubleshooting

In this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Using the Touch Screen/OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Web Browser Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Web Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

USB Parameter Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Event Log Archive/eMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

USB Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Ethernet Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Troubleshooting Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Bus Voltage Testpoints and Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Touch Screen Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

System IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

SPA, SPB, SPC, PLD Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

SPA Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

SPB Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

SPC Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

PLD Diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Action Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Status Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Stats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Circuit Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

MC-CPI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

CPI-2 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

SC-3HN Serial Hall Call Node Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

SCE-BRK Brake Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Brake Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

SCE-CON Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

SCE-CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

CPU Switches, Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

System Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

SCE-HVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

SCE-UPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Event and Fault Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Event Log Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

Touch Screen Log Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

PC Log Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

iv Manual # 42-02-2P26 9/9/15

Section 3. Maintenance Plan Information

In this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Controller General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Air Conditioned Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Load Weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

MCE Isolated Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Lead/Acid Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Every Six Months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Controller General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Conditioned Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Load Weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Lead/Acid Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Board-mounted Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Yearly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Controller General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Conditioned Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Load Weighers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Lead/Acid Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Board-mounted Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Landing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

SmarTraq Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Door Closing Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

8.6.4.19.7, 8.6.4.20.5 Maintenance and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Battery Voltage No Load Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Battery Voltage Load Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Battery Charger Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

TAPS, Traction Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

v

vi Manual # 42-02-2P26 9/9/15

Installation

In this section:

• Element Controls, page 1-2

• Safety, page 1-4

• Specifications,

page 1-5

• Operating Mode Definitions,

page 1-7

• User Interface,

page 1-11

• Component Identification, page 1-17

• Installation,

page 1-20

• Machine Room Construction Run, page 1-22

• Landing System,

page 1-27

• Serial Hall and Car Call Boards, page 1-38

• Door Operator, page 1-44

• Load Weigher,

page 1-44

• Traction Elevator Adjustment, page 1-45

• Duplex Operation,

page 1-53

• Traction Acceptance Tests, page 1-54

• Passcode, page 1-60

Installation

1-1

Installation

Element Controls

Element elevator controls are available for hydraulic or traction applications.

• Traction Applications

• Up to 16 floors

• Single, in-line openings

• Magnetek HPV 900 Series 2 or M1000 drive, KEB F5

• Up to 350 FPM

• AC geared machines

• Open or Closed Loop operation

• Simplex or Duplex dispatching

• One car operating panel per car (two if wired in parallel)

• Serial hall calls

• Serial car calls

• MCE LS-EDGE landing system, or

• MCE LS-RAIL landing system

• Load Weigher: Strain gauge, discrete

• User Interface

• On-board, touch screen (OBD) configuration

• Web browser access

• USB thumb drive for software update, parameter transfer, or event log download

• Micro SD card event storage and program backup

• Supported Door Operators

• MCE Universal door control (interface)

• MCE SmarTraq

• GAL MOVFR

• GAL MOD

• No manual, swing, or freight doors supported

1-2 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Figure 1.1 Element Traction Control

Element Controls

Braking resistor cabinet

SCE-CPU Processor Board

AC drive. May be:

TorqMax/KEB F5

Magnetek HPV 900 S2,

Magnetek M1000

SCE-HVI High Voltage I/F

SCE-BRK Brake Board

SCE-UPD Unregulated Power

Distribution Board

Brake Contactor

Optional additional I/O if required

Motor Contactor

Circuit Boards

SCE-CPU:

3.5 “ color touch screen

Capture/Test controls

Machine Room Inspection

Car/Hoistway Door Bypass

EQ reset

UIM reset

FAULT reset

Drive control

Elevator logic

SCE-HVI:

Normal slowdowns

Terminal switches

Safety string

Door locks

Rope brake

Brake control

Motor contactor

Brake contactor

Standard enclosure: 49” H x 36” W x 12” D.

Larger drives require a 13” D cabinet.

Floor mounting requires an optional floor kit and will add 18” to the height.

SCE-BRK:

Brake control

Current limited fused contact monitoring

SCE-UPD:

Bus fusing

Power distribution

Touch safe design

Power Input: 208 - 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 Phase

1-3

Installation

Safety

Certain fundamental warnings must be kept in mind at all times to help avoid accidental death, severe personal injury, or equipment damage.

Personal Safety

• Controllers may only be installed by qualified, licensed, trained elevator personnel familiar with the operation of microprocessor-based elevator controls.

• Verify safety devices (limits, governors, hoistway locks, car gate, etc.) are fully functional before running the elevator. Never operate controls with any safety device inoperative.

• The user is responsible for complying with the current National Electrical Code with respect to the overall installation of equipment and proper sizing of electrical conductors.

• The user is responsible for understanding and applying all current local, state, provincial, and federal codes that govern practices such as controller placement, applicability, wiring protection, disconnections, over-current protection, and grounding procedures.

• Controller equipment is at line voltage when AC power is connected. Never operate controls with covers removed from drive or brake controls.

• After AC power has been removed, internal capacitors can remain charged for up to 5 minutes. Wait at least 5 minutes after power down and check for live circuits before touching any components.

• Verify no remaining voltage on the large inductor below the drive. Short to ground to discharge if required.

• To reduce the risk of shock, all equipment should be securely grounded to earth ground.

Failure to obtain an actual earth ground may result in electrical shock to personnel.

• Provide equipment grounding in accordance with local code and NEC Article 250.

• When using test equipment (oscilloscopes, etc.) with a power cord that electrically ties probe common to earth ground, an isolation transformer should be used to isolate the instrument common from earth ground.

• Remain clear of all rotating equipment while working on the controls.

Equipment Safety

• Provide equipment grounding in accordance with local code and NEC Article 250. Failure to obtain a true earth ground may result in electrical shock. Improper grounding is the most common cause of electrical component failure and noise-induced problems.

• Replace components only with main line power off. Damage to equipment or unexpected operation of the elevator may occur if this precaution is not observed.

• Do not substitute or modify parts. MCE will not be responsible for modifications made in the field unless they are approved in writing by MCE.

• Circuit boards believed to be defective must be sent to MCE for repair and testing. Field repair may leave the board with undetected problems.

• Care should be taken when using test leads and jumpers to avoid shorting high voltage or ground to low voltage microprocessor circuits.

• Do not allow dust, carbon, or metallic particles to accumulate on any part of the control.

• Avoid vibration, shock, high humidity, high ambient temperature, and caustic fumes.

1-4 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Specifications

Specifications

This section lists specification and feature set information for traction installations.

• Environmental and Power Input

• Standardization and Code Compliance

• Operating Modes

• Operating Mode Definitions,

page 1-7

Table 1.1 Environmental and Power Input

Topic

Enclosures

Temperature

Humidity

Altitude

Power Input

Description

NEMA 1 standard, others available

32 to 104° F, 0 to 40° C

To 95% non-condensing

To 10,000 feet (3000 meters), drive derating per manufacturer

Power Input: 208 - 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 phase

Table 1.2 Standardization and Code Compliance

Safety

Fire Codes

Topic

Special Needs

Electrical

Pollution

Emissions

Description

- ASME A17.1/CSA B44

- ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2007 to 2013)

- ASME A17.1 or CSA B44 (2000 to 2005)

- ASME A17.1 (1996)

- New York

- Massachusetts

2010 ADA Standards

NEC, U.S., CSA B44.1/ASME A17.5

UL508C

EN12016

Table 1.3 Operating Modes

Topic Description

Simplex

Duplex

Call Response

Automatic Operation

Attended Operation

Single car, integrated dispatching

Two cars, both with integrated dispatching capability but with one car assuming dispatching control for both

Selective Collective automatic service

Passenger/normal

Test (contract speed operation without door opening)

Pretest (no hall call response, car recalls to capture floor after servicing car calls)

Independent service

In-car fire service (Fire Phase 2)

Inspection Operation Cartop inspection

Car panel inspection

Hoistway access inspection

Machine room inspection

Construction Fault Bypass Faults bypassed operation using run box or inspection controls. See

Faults Bypass note.

1-5

Installation

Table 1.3 Operating Modes

Topic

Inspection Fault Bypass

Automatic Fault Bypass

Emergency Operation

Earthquake Operation

Hall Call Loss

(Emergency Dispatch)

Flood

Emergency Power

Load Response

(discrete load weigher only)

Anti-Nuisance

Thermal overload

Description

Faults bypassed operation using inspection controls. See Faults Bypass note.

Faults bypassed operation in Automatic mode. See Faults Bypass note.

Fire service (ASME A17.1/CSA B44)

NYC Appendix K

Massachusetts (2004)

EN81-72 (2003)

Australia (1986, requires START input)

New Zealand (1997, requires START input)

ASME A17.1/CSA B44

Seismic detection

See

Emergency Dispatch Operation on page 1-9 . May be initiated by

input from external device if programmed.

Pit Flood (access blocking to one or more lower floors only)

MCE TAPS battery rescue optional, building generator I/O standard

Light load

Heavy load/Lobby departure

Standard overload

Fire Phase 2 overload (ANSI A17.1/CSA B44)

Car call cancel on direction reversal

Cancel car calls behind car

Photo eye/designated number of stops without Photo eye activation before car call cancellation

Load weigher/if the load weigher light load input (LLI) is on, and registered car calls exceeds the number entered here, all car calls will be cancelled.

Condition must be corrected before car can return to service.

Note

FAULTS BYPASS: See Touch Screen Event Listings on page 2-52 . Each fault or event lists which

fault bypass operating modes will prevent that fault. Construction blocks the greatest number of faults, Inspection next, then Automatic. Automatic mode fault bypass is on a two hour timer.

1-6 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Specifications

Operating Mode Definitions

This section describes non-automatic modes, attendant modes, automatic modes, emergency, and learn modes of operation.

Non-Automatic Modes

Non-automatic modes include:

• Cartop Inspection,

page 1-7

• Car Panel Inspection,

page 1-7

• Hoistway Access Inspection,

page 1-7

• Machine Room Inspection,

page 1-7

• Construction Mode,

page 1-8

• Learn Modes, page 1-10

In any of these modes, the car is manually operated and will not respond to building demand of any type. Position indicators and passenger annunciators will be disabled. If fire service is activated during a non-automatic mode, audible and visible annunciators will activate to alert the elevator technician but the car will not automatically exit the non-automatic mode.

Cartop Inspection Cartop Inspection has the highest priority of the inspection modes.

When it is active, the car will not operate from any other inspection station.

A switch located in the cartop inspection station places the car on cartop inspection. When this switch is activated, automatic car and door operation are immediately terminated. Doors in transit when cartop inspection is activated will immediately stop. Additional constant-pressure switches on the cartop allow the car to be moved at inspection speed (not to exceed 150 fpm).

Car Panel Inspection Car panel Inspection has the second highest priority of the inspection modes. When it is active, the car will not operate in Hoistway Access or Machine

Room inspection.

A switch located in the car operating panel places the car on car panel inspection. When this switch is activated, automatic operation is immediately terminated. Doors in transit when car panel inspection is activated will immediately stop. While on car panel inspection, door operation requires constant-pressure operation of door open/close buttons. Additional constantpressure switches allow the car to be moved at inspection speed (not to exceed 150 fpm).

Hoistway Access Inspection At both top and bottom access hall stations, a threeposition, key operated switch allows the car to be moved to gain top or bottom access. The car will move with car and hall doors open at the affected landing. If doors are in transit when hoistway access is initiated, they will stop immediately.

Machine Room Inspection Machine room inspection has the lowest priority of the inspection modes.

A switch located in the elevator controller cabinet places the car on machine room inspection.

When this switch is activated, automatic car and hall door operation are immediately terminated. Doors in transit when inspection is activated will immediately stop. Additional constantpressure switches allow the car to be moved at inspection speed (not to exceed 150 fpm).

1-7

Installation

Construction Operation Construction operation is for use when all hoistway equipment may not yet be installed. On Construction operation, the car is moved using cartop or machine room inspection inputs. To enter construction operation:

• The INSP/NORM switch on the CPU board must be in INSP position.

• The FLT BYPASS jumper just below the CPU board MACHINE RM INSPECTION switches must be in the BYPASS position.

• On the Utils (Utilities) tab/Construct and Bypass Faults Menu, enable Construction Fault

Bypass.

To bypass door faults on Construction operation:

• Set the SCE-CPU board Car and Hoistway Door Bypass switches to BYPASS.

Attended Modes

Attended modes include Independent operation and fire service phase II operation.

Independent Service When independent service is initiated, all existing car calls are immediately canceled and the elevator is removed from hall call service. With the car stopped in a door zone, if car doors are open, they will remain open; if closed, they will be opened. During independent service the car is controlled by car calls placed while independent service is active.

Upon arriving at a call, the elevator doors open and will remain open until the attendant closes the doors using constant pressure on the door close button or on a car call button. Hall and jamb mounted arrival fixtures are inoperative.

Fire Service Phase II When the car is placed on fire service phase II (in-car firefighter) operation, the elevator will operate according to the applicable local fire code. For example, A17.1 code:

• Constant pressure on the door close button initiates door closing.

• Registration of a destination call and pressing door close button initiates door closing.

• When exiting Fire Phase II and the car arrives at the fire recall floor, doors open automatically.

Automatic Modes of Operation

Automatic modes include passenger mode, capture for test (pretest), and test modes.

Passenger Mode During passenger mode, the car responds to hall and car calls under selective-collective operation. Passenger mode is the default mode of operation and is active so long as no other mode is selected.

Capture for Test (Pretest) When placed in Pretest mode, the car is taken out of hall call service and arrival annunciators disabled. Remaining car calls will be served and new car calls may be placed but, when the car completes servicing car calls, it will recall to the designated Capture floor or remain at the last floor served; door action as programmed.

Capture operation is overridden by all modes except passenger operation.

1-8 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Specifications

Test Mode It is the responsibility of maintenance personnel to be certain that the elevator is empty before entering test mode. In test mode, the elevator doors will remain closed. The car runs at contract speed, responding to car calls placed through the controller touch screen.

Recall Four general purpose recall inputs are provided. Each is independently configurable. See

Recall Switches on page 2-17

.

Emergency Modes of Operation

Emergency modes of operation include:

• Fire Recall,

page 1-9

• Earthquake Operation, page 1-9

• Pit Flood Operation,

page 1-9

• Emergency Power Operation,

page 1-9

• Emergency Dispatch Operation,

page 1-9

Fire Recall Fire recall operation (Fire Phase I) recalls the elevator to a designated fire recall floor (main or alternate) and removes it from passenger operation. Fire recall can be initiated by smoke detectors or by a fire recall switch.

At the recall floor, the car will wait with doors closed or open (as configured). The car may enter fire phase II operation automatically or by activation of a key switch inside the car.

Earthquake Operation Earthquake operation affects all automatic modes of operation. When a seismic input becomes active, the car will immediately stop and determine if it is appropriate to allow the elevator to move at reduced speed in accordance with the earthquake restrictions of the jurisdiction.

Pit Flood Operation If a flooded pit is detected and pit flood is activated, the car will be prevented from servicing one or more lower floors (depending on job site configuration of the controller).

Emergency Power Operation Emergency power operation, if provided, is activated when normal power loss is detected. Emergency power may be provided by a building generator or by a battery powered rescue device.

If power is provided by a generator, the car will pause until generator power is stable and then recall to a designated floor and open its doors for passenger exit. If the generator has sufficient power, one or more cars may be configured to run on emergency power.

If power is provided by the MCE Traction Auxiliary Power Supply (TAPS), the auxiliary power supply provides single phase backup power, directs the controller to move the car safely to a landing, and provides power to open the elevator doors. If the elevator controller chooses a direction that draws power beyond a customer-preset level, the system will direct the controller to pause the car, then reverse direction to the nearest landing, again providing power to open the doors and allow passengers to exit.

Emergency Dispatch Operation If a communications failure prevents hall calls from being registered, the car will enter emergency dispatch operation. In this mode, the controller generates car calls, sequentially dispatching the car to floors and allowing any passengers at those floors to enter and place a car call. This operation allows the elevator to continue service to the building in the absence of normal hall call registration. When the hall calls are again able to communicate, the elevator will resume normal passenger operation.

1-9

Installation

Learn Modes

Learn modes are special operating modes that allow the elevator to learn landing system and hoistway switch configurations.

Landing System Learn After the landing system has been installed, the Landing System Learn operation can be accessed through the UTILS, Landing System Utilities menu. The learn menu will guide you through the required steps, beginning with running the car to the bottom landing on Inspection mode and ending when all terminal and floor level magnets have been learned.

Terminal Switch Learn After the car has been adjusted for high speed running and you are satisfied with performance and accuracy, the Terminal Switch Learn operation can be accessed through the UTILS, Landing System Utilities menu. The terminal switch learn is performed on Test mode with the car running at contract speed. The operation will learn and set

NTS2 (if used), ETS, NTS1, and directional limit position, speed, and deltas (allowable ranges).

Any changes made to S-Curve or speed parameters after the hoistway learn operation has been performed will require that it be repeated.

1-10 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

User Interface

User Interface

System status display, configuration, and diagnostics are through the on-board, color, touchscreen (OBD - On Board Display). 1 No external programming tools are required. You must be on Inspection mode to change and save parameters. The interface provides:

• Home, page 1-11

• Config 01, 02, and 03, page 1-13

• Utils, page 1-14

• System IO,

page 1-14

• System Diag, page 1-14

• SPA Diag,

page 1-15

• SPB Diag,

page 1-15

• SPC Diag,

page 1-15

• PLD Diag,

page 1-15

• Action Info,

page 1-15

• Status Info, page 1-16

• Stats,

page 1-16

• Scope,

page 1-16

Home Screen

Figure 1.2 Home Screen

Note

For detailed parameter descriptions, see

Screen Descriptions on page 2-5 .

1. Web browser access is supported. Parameters may be transferred from controller to controller using a USB drive.

1-11

Installation

Mode of Operation

This screen section lets you know immediately what mode of operation the elevator is currently using. Typically, this will be Passenger mode but it may be any of several different modes. In our example illustration, the car is on CT (Car Top) INSPECTION operation. Please see Operating Modes on

page 1-7

.

The second line of the display shows any events or faults that may be active in yellow text. Usually, this line will be blank.

Faults and Safety

These “LED” indicators provide immediate information about factors affecting elevator operation.

• SAFETY:

• Green = Safety string OK.

• Red = Safety string open.

• FAULT:

• Blank = No Faults

• Yellow = One or more self-resetting faults are active.

• Flash Yellow = One (or more) latching faults (requiring fault reset) are active.

• LOCKS:

• Green = Door lock string is made up.

• Blank = Door lock string is open.

• CPU:

• Green = All CPUs (SPA, SPB, SPC, PLD, LS-EDGE-EL) are online and communicating.

• Red = One (or more) CPU(s) is/are offline or not communicating.

• BUS:

• Green = All buses (2LS, 3HN, M2MV …) hardware status okay.

• Red = One (or more) bus(es) is/are not detected.

• Yellow = One (or more) buses is/are not detected due to normal operation (ie, the 2LS bus is temporarily interrupted when the doors are open).

• COM:

• Green = All CPUs are communicating with all buses (3HN, CAN, COP, …).

• Red = One (or more) CPUs not communicating with one or more buses.

System Status

This section tells you how the system is operating right now.

• CAR CALLS:

• Green = Car is in service for car calls.

• Blank = Car is not in service for car calls.

• HALL CALLS:

• Green = Car is in service for hall calls.

• Blank = Car is not in service for hall calls.

1-12 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

User Interface

• SIMPLEX/DISP ID: nn

• Dispatcher - Duplex installation, assigning hall calls for itself and for the second car of the Duplex.

• Disp ID: nn - indicates that this car is accepting hall call assignments from the other car in a Duplex installation.

• Simplex: Single self-dispatching car.

Additional information provided in this screen section includes:

Table 1.4 General Status Information

Topic Description

Intended Direction

Actual Direction

Position

Destination

Door Status

Door Lock Status

Car Speed

Car Label

Intended direction of travel (preferred direction)

Actual direction of travel (direction command activated)

Logical position, user defined floor label

Next destination, user defined floor label

Door state display (closed, opening, open, closing, stalled)

Door locks/Car safety string

Commanded car speed

Label assigned to this car (1A in our example)

Car motion animation Arrows scroll rapidly in high speed operation; slow on Inspection

Date and Time mm/dd/yy and 00.00.00 am/pm

Menu Overview

See Section 2 for details about parameter settings,

Screen Descriptions on page 2-5 . With the

car on Inspection mode, take some time to go through all the menus to become familiar with parameter settings and their locations.

Table 1.5 Config 01, 02, and 03

Topic Description

Config 01

Building Setup,

page 2-5

Job Info and Labels, page 2-5

Elevator Features,

page 2-6

Controller type, floor information, Fire code and recall floors, landing system type.

Job information, car and floor labels

Capture and recall floors, car behavior, antinuisance

Configure Spare Inputs, page 2-7

Configure spare inputs.

Configure Spare Outputs, page 2-7

Configure spare outputs.

System Timers,

page 2-8

Motor delays, door timers, car delay timers

Config 02

Hoistway Setup,

page 2-10

NTS2 Switches, page 2-10

ETS Switches,

page 2-11

S-Curve, page 2-12

NTS1 Switches, page 2-14

System Control Parameters,

page 2-15

Floor heights, offsets, access distances, counterweight position

Normal Terminal Slowdown 2 switch setup

ETS, ETSL setup

Speed curve setup

Normal Terminal Slowdown 1 switch setup

Dispatcher, speed, overspeed, emergency brake setup.

1-13

Installation

Table 1.5 Config 01, 02, and 03

Topic

Building Security,

page 2-17

Emergency Power, page 2-17

Recall Switches,

page 2-17

Network Settings, page 2-18

Table 1.6 Utilities

Description

Config 03

Security settings

Power type, recall and run selections

Recall switch settings

IP address information

Topic

File Transfer, page 2-18

Register Calls, page 2-18

Construct and Bypass Faults,

page 2-18

Safety Tests,

page 2-18

Date and Time,

page 2-18

Landing System Utilities,

page 2-

18

Description

Allows you to selectively transfer controller parameters:

- Backup Current Settings

- Restore Backup Settings

- Restore Factory Settings

- Export Current Settings to USB Drive

- Import & Apply Settings from USB Drive

- Export Events to USB Drive

Car and hall call registration

Enable Construction mode/fault bypass. Set fault bypass for

Inspection and Automatic modes.

Commissioning tests (Test descriptions, page 1-54 )

Set date and time

Landing system learn; Landing system view; Terminal switch learn.

Table 1.7 System IO

Topic Description

System Inputs, page 2-19

System Outputs, page 2-19

Aux CPI IO’s

View system input status

View system output status

Programmed Inputs, page 2-19

View programmed input status

Programmed Outputs,

page 2-19

View programmed output status

Main CPI IO’s View status of main CPI board IOs

View status of aux CPI board IOs

Table 1.8 System Diagnostics

Topic

Motion IO,

page 2-19

Event Log,

page 2-19

Door Control,

page 2-19

Diagnostics Tree, page 2-19

Landing System,

page 2-19

Active Events,

page 2-19

Description

Drive control, hoistway switches, emergency brake

First In/First Out logging of system events

View door control signal status

Safety related signal activity flags

View landing system signal status

View currently active system events

1-14 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

User Interface

Table 1.9 SPA Diagnostics

Topic Description

SPA Flags Registers and active flags

SPA Numeric

SPA Motion Numeric

Register data pertaining to general I/O

Register data pertaining to car movement

Emerg Pwr & Earthquake View emergency power and earthquake related flags.

Door Dwell Times Conditions affecting door dwell time with activity indicators

Itinerary manager Conditions affecting car travel with activity indicators

Table 1.10 SPB Diagnostics

Topic

SPB Flags

SPB Numeric

SPB Inputs

SPB Outputs

Registers and active flags

Register data

SPB input flags

SPB output flags

Description

Table 1.11 SPC Diagnostics

Topic

SPC Flags

SPC Numeric

SPC Inputs

SPC Outputs

Group to Car Data

Car to Group Data

Registers and active flags

Register data

SPC input flags

SPC output flags

Group to car data monitoring

Car to group data monitoring

Description

Table 1.12 PLD Diagnostics

Topic

PLD Flags

PLD Numeric

PLD Inputs

PLD Outputs

Description

Flags for PLD related system operations.

PLD register data

Activity on inputs related to the PLD.

Activity on outputs related to the PLD.

Table 1.13 Action Information

Topic Description

Car call cancelled due to Cancellation conditions with activity indicators

Hall call cancelled due to Cancellation conditions with activity indicators

Door open due to

Door close due to

Conditions affecting door opening with activity indicators

Conditions affecting door closing with activity indicators

Prohibit run/start due to Conditions affecting car starting and running

1-15

Installation

Table 1.14 Status Information

Topic Description

CPU Bus communications Conditions affecting microprocessor communication with activity indicator

Hall Bus Inventory Inventory and test hall call nodes and indicators

Can Bus Viewer

Version Information

View CAN bus device IDs and related messaging activity.

Software version information

Other Car Settings

Address Diagnostics

Second car settings display for duplex operation

Access selected processor register contents via address entry. Technician assisted troubleshooting.

Table 1.15 Statistics

Topic

Maintenance Statistics

Hourly Statistics

Description

Statistics pertinent to system maintenance

Statistics for the last 24 hours of operation, per hour

Table 1.16 Scope

Topic Description

View Scope

Select From Landing System

Select and track four system signals in near real time, from:

Switches, slowdowns, door zones

Select From System Inputs Dedicated inputs

Select From Programmed Inputs Assignable inputs

Select From System Outputs Dedicated outputs

Select From Programmed Outputs Assignable outputs

1-16 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Component Identification

Figure 1.3 System Architecture

MACHINE ROOM

CONTROLLER

Component Identification

AC Drive

Braking Unit or other if required

Hall Call Node

Hall Call Node

Hall Call Node

Hall Call Node

Hall Call Node

Hall Call Node

CPU

USB

Micro SD Card

High Voltage Interface

SCE-HVI

Brake Control

SCE-BRK

Power Distribution

SCE-UPD

Expanded I/O

(if required)

Brake

Contactor

Main Fuses Choke

Motor

Contactor

Starter

MC-CPI-2 interface board collects discrete button, switch, or input signals and converts them to serial data for efficient transmission.

Discrete I/O on the CPI board interfaces to the selected door operator.

COP ENCLOSURE

IO24

IO23

IO22

IO21

IO20

IO19

IO18

IO17

IO8

IO7

IO6

IO5

IO4

IO3

IO2

IO1

IO16

IO15

IO14

IO13

IO12

IO11

IO10

IO9

RST

+V

COM

+V

COM

MC-CPI-2

COM

24V

SCE-CON

1-17

Installation

Typical system components:

• Elevator Controller and standard circuit boards (including drive)

• Landing System -

• LS-EDGE, or LS-RAIL (

page 1-27 )

• SC-3HN serial hall call node boards (one in each hall fixture; one for each additional required riser input)

• MC-CPI-2

• The MC-CPI-2 board serializes COP button and switch information. This board mounts in the car operating panel. The CPI-2 board is also used in the controller cabinet to support additional system I/O.

• SCE-CON interface board

• Provides a system CAN to landing system interface. LS-EDGE-EL and LS-RAIL landing systems allow most hoistway switches to exist virtually in software. This vastly reduces hoistway installation and wiring time. This board is usually mounted in the COP with the

MC-CPI-2 board but may be mounted in a car top box as well.

1-18 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

SCE-CPU board switches:

Component Identification

• Test/Pretest:

• Pretest captures the car by disabling hall calls, serving only car calls, and remaining at the selected recall floor (door operation as set).

• Test allows the car to be operated at contract speed with doors and hall calls disabled.

• The switch center position disables Test/Pretest operation.

• Machine Rm Inspection Insp/Normal:

• Inspection: Places the car on Machine Room Inspection operation.

• Normal: Places the car on Passenger (automatic) operation.

• Machine Room Enable and Up/Down:

• To move the car on Inspection operation, the Enable switch must be held in the Enable position and the Up/Down switch must be held in the desired direction. When Enable or the direction switch is released, the car will stop.

• Car Door/Hoistway Door Bypass switches:

• Used to bypass the car or hoistway door electric contacts (Bypass position). When set to Bypass, the car will run only on Inspection mode.

SCE-CPU Board Reset controls:

• EQ RST: Use to reset the earthquake input and restore normal operation.

• UIM RST: Use to reset the emergency brake following an unintended motion incident.

• FAULT: Use to reset controller faults.

• RSTP: Use to reset the PLD.

• RSTA: Use to reset processor A.

• RSTB: Use to reset processor B.

• RSTC: Use to reset processor C.

1-19

Installation

Installation

The job prints provide the information required to wire and set up the controller. This section provides information in support of the prints.

Installation Checklist

• Verify incoming power

• Install controller,

page 1-20

• Connect NEC250, certified ground, page 1-20

• Connect motor control voltages,

page 1-21

• Connect motor encoder

• Install safety string components per job prints

• Verify controller is on Inspection operation

• Connect AC power from mains to controller

• Verify controller settings; verify drive settings,

page 1-23, page 1-25

• Set up for construction operation,

page 1-22

• Install hoistway switches (may be physical or virtual) and landing system, page 1-27

• Learn landing system, page 1-46

• Install door operator,

page 1-44

• Balance car and counterweight

• Set counterweight height at adjacent-to-car position,

page 1-45

• Verify brake will hold 125% of load

• Adjust S-Curve in middle of hoistway (accel/decel/speed/jerk; Test mode), page 1-48

• Learn hoistway switches (position/speed), page 1-51

• Install car and hall calls, PIs,

page 1-38

• Verify accurate landing at all floors

• Perform commissioning tests, page 1-54

Enclosure Installation

Secure the controller enclosure on a wall or use the optional floor mounting kit as required. Use provided wiring knock-outs to install raceway or conduit to route wires into the cabinet. If you drill or cut the cabinet, do not allow metal chips or shavings to fall into electronics. Damage caused by this is not covered by warranty.

Grounding

A professional electrician-certified, NEC 250, earth ground is imperative. Most electrical noise and/or intermittent continuity problems result from poor grounding.

1-20 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Installation

Check for Shorts to Ground

With no power applied to the controller:

1. Note, then unplug the five input-end connectors from the SCE-UPD board. See illustration below.

2. Remove touch-safe fuse covers. Measure resistance from each fuse (either end) on the board to ground.

3. If there are any shorts to ground, troubleshoot related connections to find and correct the short.

4. Replace touch-safe fuse covers.

5. Reconnect the input connectors to the SCE-UPD board.

SCE-UPD Board

Unplug these connectors:

AC Power, Motor, Brake

Connect AC power, motor, and brake as shown in the job prints.

Wire Separation

High voltage wiring must be routed in separate conduit from control or digital communications wiring to avoid potential interference. Size the conduit so that removing pre assembled connectors is not required.

Initial Power Check

Always have a helper standing by the AC disconnect to power up the controller and to immediately shut down if necessary.

1. Verify that the Machine Room Inspection switch is in the INSP position.

2. Check the line side of the Main Power Disconnect switch to verify that all three legs are at the correct voltage.

3. Physically verify that all car and hoistway doors are closed and locked and that no one is in a dangerous position should the car move unexpectedly.

4. Power up the control. Be prepared to immediately shut it down if the car attempts to move.

1-21

Installation

Machine Room Construction Run

Before running on Construction mode, certain equipment must be in place:

• Final limit switches. These switches are wired into the safety string and will immediately drop power to the machine and brake when opened.

• Pit Stop Switch (Safety string should be as complete as possible)

• Fully functional governor and car safeties

• The governor overspeed switch must be wired into the Safety string

• Pit buffers

• Temporary run box (if cartop inspection run is to be used)

• Traction car and counterweight must be roughly balanced per anticipated loading.

The SAFC input on the SCE-HVI board must see 110VAC before the car can run. If you have a minimal safety string connected as shown in the job prints and as referenced above, this requirement will be met. See figure below.

Before the landing system is installed and the hoistway is learned, the car will be unable to run on construction mode due to faults generated by the lack of this equipment. To bypass faults on construction mode:

• On the SCE-CPU board, move the FLT BYPASS jumper to BYPASS. This bypasses controller response to faults (except Overspeed) during Inspection operation. Inspection mode fault bypass remains active, even across power cycles, until set to NORM.

• Go to the Utilities menu on the touch screen (UTILS), select Construct and Bypass Faults.

• Press Construction/Fault Bypass Disabled button to set it to Enabled.

Construction Run: Cartop

To run on Construction mode using a temporary run box connected to cartop inspection inputs, see the following.

TEMPORARY RUN BOX

SCE-UPD

24HWY

24FS

24CTP

1

1

1

SCE-UPD

2LS

2LS

DLN2

DLN1

GOS2

GOS1

1

2

2

Run Enable

Run Up

Run Down

Norm

Insp

EMERGENCY STOP

SCE-CPU

CTEN

INCP

ICTU

ICTD

INCT*

SCE-HVI

GOV

SAFH

SAFC*

ESC

INCT to 24CTP through a switch allows you to enable and disable car top inspection.

1-22 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Machine Room Construction Run

Required Drive Settings

In order to operate safely in construction, drive parameters must be verified. Parameters are preset at the factory according to specific job information but must be verified before attempting to move the elevator. If the drive manual provides a procedure for AC induction motor learn, complete that procedure for best drive/motor matching.

Magnetek HPV900 Series 2

Verify/set the drive parameters shown below. For now, remaining drive parameters may be left at default values.

Figure 1.4 Magnetek Setup Overview

U0 Utility Menu

U9 Drive Mode

A1 Drive menu

Contract Car Speed

Contract Motor Speed

Brake Pick Time

Encoder Pulses

A2 S-Curves menu

Accel Rate 0

Decel Rate 0

Accel Jerk Out 0

Decel Jerk In 0

Decel Jerk Out 0

Cls/Opn Loop

Per job

Per motor

0.0

Per job

7.99 ft/s2

7.99 ft/s2

0.00

0.00

0.00

A4 Power Convert menu

Input L-L Volts Per job

A5 Motor Menu

Motor ID

Rated Mtr Power

Rated Mtr Volts

Rated Excit Freq

Rated Motor Curr

Motor Poles

Rated Mtr Speed

(4 or 6 pole)

Per motor

Per motor

Per motor

Per motor

Per motor

Per motor

C1 User Switches menu

Spd Command Src

Run Command Src

Spd Reg Type

Pre-Torque Source

Fault Reset Src

Ramped Stop Sel

Ramp Down En Src

Motor Ovrld Sel

Serial Mode

Serial

Serial

Elev Spd Reg

Serial

Serial

Ramp On Stop

Run Logic

Fault At Stop

Mode 1

C2 Logic Inputs menu

Logic Input 1 (TB1-1)

Logic Input 3 - 9

Drive Enable

No Function

C3 Logic Outputs menu

Logic Output 1 (TB1-13) Ready To Run

Logic Output 2 (TB1-14) Run Commanded

Logic Output 3 (TB1-15) Speed Reg Rls

Logic Output 4 (TB1-16) Ramp Down En

Relay Coil 1 (TB2-27/28/29) Ready to Run

Relay Coil 2 (TB2-30/31/32) Speed Reg Rls

C4 Analog Outputs menu

Analog Output 1 (TB2-1) Speed Command

Analog Output 2 (TB2-8) Speed Feedback

Note

A1 drive menu Contract Car Speed must be equal to Element Config 02/Contract

Speed. Once set, Element Config 02/

Contract Speed should NOT BE

CHANGED.

If it is desired to slow the car for testing, use the Config 02/High Speed setting.

1-23

Installation

KEB F5, v3.21

This version of the F5 drive features an LCD and restructured parameters for easier setup. The drive is programmed by MCE before the controller is shipped but you must verify that settings match actual site requirements.

Figure 1.5 KEB Setup Overview

Basic Setup

US02 System Ft/min=1

US04 Control Type Serial Svc 50=5

US06 Contract Speed Rated Spd

If changes made: US05, Write to Drive=2

Inputs

LI01 Type

LI15 Direction Sel Inp

Control Settings

LC01 Control Mode

0=PNP

0=Up/Dn+Dir

Motor Data

LM01

LM02

Motor Power

Motor Speed

Motor Data

Motor Data

LM03 Motor Current Motor Data

LM04 Motor Frequency Motor Data

LM05 Motor Voltage Motor Data

LM06 Motor Power Factor Motor Data

If unknown, 0.9 for high slip, 0.75 for Induction

LM08 El Motor Protect

LM09 Protect Current

1=On

Motor Rated Current

Clsd Loop=2

Clsd Loop PTrq=3

Note

Drive US06 Contract Speed must be equal to Element Config 02/Contract Speed.

Once set, Element Config 02/Contract

Speed should NOT BE CHANGED.

If it is desired to slow the car for testing, use the Element Config 02/High Speed setting.

Encoder Data

Machine Data

LN02

LN03

Gear Ratio

Roping Ratio

Motor Learn

See Motor Learn in KEB Manual

Motor Data

Per Site

Note

We recommend that you carefully read the drive manual shipped with your controller to become familiar with menus and capabilities.

Full Drive Parameters

For full drive parameters and setting recommendations, please refer to the drive setting reference documents shipped with the controller.

1-24 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Machine Room Construction Run

Required Controller Settings

To get the car running on construction mode, verify/set the following parameters. Please refer to “Screen Descriptions” on page 2-5.

• CONFIG01/Building Setup/Controller Type = Traction

• CONFIG02/System Control Parameters

• Hoist Motor Speed (RPM)

• Inspection Speed (FPM)

• Drive Type

Brake Pick/Hold Voltages

Pick and hold voltages are set using the HOLD and PICK potentiometers on the SCE-BRK board.

1. Set Pick and Hold potentiometers on the SCE-BRK board to their mid-points.

2. Place SCE-BRK jumper JP1 in the PICK_ONLY position. This will allow time to make adjustment before the controller switches to HOLD mode (normally about 1.5 seconds after PICK begins with jumper in PCK & HLD position).

3. Place a voltmeter across the brake leads where they connect to the screw terminals labeled BR+ and BR- on the SCE-BRK board.

4. Use Inspection controls to pick the brake. Adjust PICK voltage using the PICK trim pot.

Do this quickly to avoid overheating the brake coil.

5. Release the inspection controls and allow the brake to drop.

6. Place jumper JP1 in the PCK & HLD position.

7. Pick the brake as before. The controller will first apply pick voltage, then shift to hold mode. (LED indicators show which mode you are in.) Adjust the HOLD voltage using the HOLD trim pot.

Note

There is some interaction between PICK and HOLD controls so repeat the above PICK procedure to ensure that PICK and HOLD voltages are correct. If brake voltage is too high or too low you can alter the applied AC voltage at SCE-BRK terminals BRL1 and BRL2 by moving the conductors attached to taps X9 through X16 on the T1 transformer secondary.

Brake Faults

• Overcurrent: Overcurrent limit specification for the brake board is set at 10 A. If brake coil current exceeds this amount, the BRK FLT LED will light and the driver will be disabled until the brake is dropped again.

• IGBT: If the Q4 IGBT fails shorted, the IGBT FLT LED will light and will not go out until the board is repaired. If the board is powered OFF, then ON the IGBT FLT LED will immediately light again.

• If brake pick/position switch is installed (Config 01/Spare Inputs/Brake Sw), user may see brake pick switch open/closed/flaky faults if switch malfunctions.

Brake Transformer Information Please refer to the SCE-BRK description in Section

2 of this manual for brake transformer information,

page 2-37 .

1-25

Installation

Initial Speed Calibration

Now that the brake is picking and holding it is time to do a rough calibration of inspection speed.

Magnetek

On Inspection Mode: Using a hand held tachometer, adjust drive parameter A1 CONTRACT

MTR SPD until the car velocity matches the setting under CONFIG 02 / SYSTEM CONTROL

PARAMETERS / INSPECTION SPEED. Increasing the drive parameters will result in a faster moving car.

KEB

On Inspection Mode: Using a hand held tachometer, adjust drive parameter LN02 GEAR

RATIO until the car velocity matches the setting under CONFIG 02 / SYSTEM CONTROL

PARAMETERS / INSPECTION SPEED.

1-26 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-EDGE Landing System

LS-EDGE Landing System

The LS-EDGE kit contains the sensor head assembly, an “L” bracket to mount the sensor assembly to a uni-strut that is in turn attached to the elevator cab (uni-strut to elevator cab not provided), steel tape, top and bottom steel tape hanger assemblies, the required number of door zone magnets, and the CAT-5 electrical cables required to connect the sensor to the interface board.

Depending on applicable code, you may have to route electrical connections through conduit. If so, we recommend minimum 3/4-inch flex so that the modular connectors can slide through without binding. Perforations for cable tie wrap connection are provided on the RJ-45 plug-end of the sensor head.

Figure 1.6 LS-EDGE Components

Top hanger assembly

(diagonal brace not shown)

LS-TAPEMNTOP-EDGE

Together, these are assembly

LS-TAPEMNT-EDGE

Bottom hanger assembly

LS-TAPE-MNTBOT-EDGE

Sensor assembly

LS-EDGE

Steel tape, magnets & connecting cables not shown

1-27

Installation

Tape Installation

Before installing perforated tape, ensure adequate clearance from beams, walls, counterweight, cab, and terminal limit devices. Make sure the sensor is not placed so close to the governor lift arm that, when the car safeties are activated, the sensor is damaged or the car safeties cannot apply.

• Hang the tape high enough in the hoistway so that, when the counterweight is on a fully compressed buffer, the sensor assembly will not be damaged by overhead obstructions.

Uni-struts are provided to attach the tape to the rails.

• Attach the tape in the pit low enough so that, when the car is on fully compressed buffer, the sensor assembly does not contact the bottom hanger assembly.

• Adjust tape spring tension so the tape does not make noise as the car travels up.

• During installation, the edges of the tape sometimes become gouged. After the tape is installed, use a fine file on the edges of the tape to remove any burrs or gouges. This will lead to much quieter operation of the encoder system as the car travels at contract speed.

• After smoothing the edges, wipe off all excess oil and dirt from the face of the tape before installing magnets. Do not use rags that will leave lint on the tape.

Top and Bottom Hangers

1. Attach the uni-strut for the top tape hanger across the back of the selected guide rail using the forged rail clips and hardware provided.

2. Attach the diagonal brace as shown below. (Used only when tape length exceeds 150 feet.)

19 - 25 ft lbs

40 - 50 ft lbs see Detail A

90 degrees

30 - 40 ft lbs

Hang tape on tab

Tape hanger

LS-TAPESTRUT-EDGE included only when tape length requires extra support

40 - 50 ft lbs

Top tape clamp hardware,

10 - 12 ft lbs

Detail A

1-28 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-EDGE Landing System

3. Adjust extended strut length as required (tape suspended as close to the guide rail as adequate clearances will allow to reduce loading on end of unistrut). Secure rail mounting hardware (40 - 50 ft lbs.). (The tape hanger slides in the strut for fine adjustment later.)

4. Hook the tape on the protruding tab. Secure the top tape clamp in place (10 - 12 ft lbs.).

5. Record the distance from the rail edge to the tape edge. ________ in/mm.Bottom

Hanger

The bottom hanger provides tension to minimize vibration while allowing expansion/contraction across seasonal temperature ranges. Ensure that the tape to rail edge measurement matches that recorded for the top hanger so that the car tracks the tape accurately. Do not use a plumb in case the rail stack is not exactly aligned. The scale values are provided as a guideline only. They are not calibrated. Adjust to suit the installation.

Figure 1.7 Bottom Hanger Attachment

Connection torque specifications,

Wire AWG

10 - 12 ft lbs

Tape tension gauge

Oval indicates location of

“pre-load” pin holes allowing you to put tension on the spring while hanging the tape.

40 - 50 ft lbs

Broken Tape Switch

Wire per job prints.

Tension gauge indicator

Tape

Gripping

Tab

19 - 25 ft lbs

Detail B

Bottom tape clamp hardware

10 - 12 ft lbs

1-29

Installation

LS-EDGE Broken Tape Switch

The normally closed contacts on the Broken Tape Switch are used to detect a broken tape condition. The switch is mounted backwards for protection during shipment. Remove it and mount it as shown on

page 1-29.

Position the switch so that the cam on the tensioner activates (opens) the switch when the tensioner is at the bottom of its travel (no tension). Note that switch position should be adjusted so that the switch is activated by the cam but not so close that the switch is held against its mechanical stops. The switch activates at approximately 50% of travel.

Tape Hanging

Work from the cartop to hang the tape from the top hanger and allow it to unroll slowly as you move the car down the hoistway. It is best to allow the tape to hang and straighten for at least

24-hours before attaching it to the bottom hanger.

Tape Tension

The tape is tensioned according to compression of the bottom tape mount spring. The tension gauge provides visual indication of low, medium, and high tension positions. Short runs, up to five floors will generally be acceptable at the low tension position. Runs to 15 floors will generally be acceptable at the medium tension position. Longer runs may require the high tension position but you should start out with the medium setting first.

Tape tension is intended to reduce noise caused by tape vibration at contract speed. Generally, you want to use the lowest tension setting that maintains a quiet tape at contract speed.

1-30 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-EDGE Landing System

Sensor Installation

Tape guide side pieces easily detach so the sensor can be slipped onto the steel tape.

Figure 1.8 Sensor with Guide Sides Removed

Figure 1.9 Sensor Mounting

LED Indicators UP

40 - 50 ft lbs

“L” bracket (provided)

Customer provided uni-strut

CAR TOP

Sensor Alignment

After the tape has been installed, check the sensor alignment. The sensor should not ride hard on either side of the uni-strut bracket during any part of travel through the hoistway. In highrise buildings, if rail alignment varies substantially, it may cause the encoder guides to wear prematurely. If such misalignment is noted, the installation should be inspected more regularly.

1-31

Installation

Door Zone Magnets

5.5-inch strip magnets are used at each floor/opening position. Front and rear magnet alignment is shown on the sensor top label. Looking at the perforated tape from the elevator car, the magnets for the front door zone are mounted to the left of the perforated holes; magnets for the rear door zone are mounted to the right of the holes. Special magnets marked with a stripe are used at the top and bottom terminals and for ETS magnets if used.

Figure 1.10 Door Zone Magnet Alignment

Scribe

Line

2 5/8 inches

Top of

Magnet

Caution

The magnets must be installed so that they face the front cover of the sensor assembly as indicated by the diagram on the LED indicator label.

To mount the door zone magnets:

1. Move the elevator level to the highest floor on inspection.

2. Make a mark on the tape even with the top of the sensor assembly. Lower the car one foot.

3. Place the top of the door zone magnet 2 5/8 inches below the scribe mark and to the left

(front door) or right (rear door) of the perforated holes. For now, simply place the magnets. You can secure them permanently after final adjustments.

4. Continue mounting door zone magnets as described above for successive floors. Maximum floor height is 40.0 feet.

1-32 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-EDGE Landing System

Top Terminal & ETS Magnets

For Element, use Front Door instructions only. Magnets marked with a stripe to differentiate them from the door zone magnets are used at the top and bottom terminals. 5-inch striped magnets are also used for physical ETS when required. (If reduced stroke buffers are used, cam operated ETSL switches may also be required. See

Please refer to “Permanent Magnet Attachment” on page 1-35.

Figure 1.11 Top Terminal and ETS

TOP TERMINAL

FRONT

ONLY

2 5/8” TO

TOP OF

DZ MAGNET

SCRIBE

5” STRIPED

MAGNET

5 1/2” DZ

MAGNET

40-11-0027

40-11-0024

5” STRIPED

MAGNET

24” STRIPED

MAGNET

40-11-0026

IF ETS

MAGNETS

USED

5” STRIPED

ETS MAGNET

1. Place a 24-inch, striped magnet to the right of the tape perforations, just below the top door zone magnet as shown above. The top of the 24-inch magnet must be even with the bottom of the door zone magnet.

2. For jobs with front doors only stack two 5-inch striped magnets above the 24-inch magnet. Leave NO GAPS between the striped magnets.

3. For jobs with rear or front and rear doors, stack one 5-inch striped magnet directly above the Rear Door Zone magnet. Leave no gaps between the ends of the magnets.

4.

Please refer to “Permanent Magnet Attachment” on page 1-35 for ETS magnet location if

the job uses ETS. Top ETS magnets mount on the left tape face, opposite the top terminal magnets.

1-33

Installation

Bottom Terminal & ETS Magnets

Magnets marked with a stripe to differentiate them from door zone magnets are used at the top and bottom terminals. 5-inch striped magnets are also used for physical ETS when required. (If reduced stroke buffers are used, cam operated ETSL switches may also be required. See

Permanent Magnet Attachment on page 1-35.

Figure 1.12 Bottom Terminal and ETS

BOTTOM TERMINAL

FRONT

ONLY

IF ETS

MAGNETS

USED

5” STRIPED

ETS MAGNET

24” STRIPED

MAGNET

SCRIBE

2 5/8” TO

TOP OF

DZ MAGNET

5 1/2” DZ

MAGNET

5” STRIPED

MAGNET

1. Place a 24-inch, striped magnet to the left of the tape perforations, just above the bottom door zone magnet as shown above. The bottom of the 24-inch magnet must be even with the top of the door zone magnet.

2. For jobs with rear doors only, stack two 5-inch striped magnets below the 24-inch magnet. Leave NO GAPS between the striped magnets.

3. For jobs with front or front and rear doors, stack one 5-inch striped magnet directly below the Front Door Zone magnet. Leave no gaps between the ends of the magnets.

4.

Please refer to “Permanent Magnet Attachment” on page 1-35 for ETS magnet location if

the job uses ETS. Bottom ETS magnets mount on the right tape face, opposite the bottom terminal magnets.

1-34 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-EDGE Landing System

Electrical Connection

Make electrical connections as shown in the job prints. Element installations use the DISC (discrete) and M-CAN connections.

Caution

Secure cables with a nylon tie wrap through the holes provided. VERY IMPORTANT as this provides strain relief and prevents connector fatigue over time.

Figure 1.13 Sensor Connections

Element CAN & Discrete, 1 orange and 1 blue cable

Parameter Settings

Verify touch screen Config 01, Building Setup information is correct.

Hoistway Learn

Please refer to “Landing System Learn” on page 1-46

.

Offset

All compatible controllers allow the door zone heights to be individually adjusted in 0.10 inch increments to compensate for magnet placement irregularity. Please refer to CONFIG02, Hoistway Setup.

Permanent Magnet Attachment

Once the hoistway has been successfully learned and door zone magnet placement is satisfactory, you may “lock” the magnets in place by placing a drop of silicone adhesive immediately above the top end and immediately below the bottom end of each magnet.

1-35

Installation

Indicators

Lighted indicator LEDs on top of the sensor unit provide information about active signals.

Figure 1.14 Indicator LEDs

MAIN: LED blinks- processor A active.

DLMR: Down Level Marker Rear.

DZR: Door Zone Rear.

ULMR: Up Level Marker Rear.

SDU: Slow Down Up.

DP1:Quadrature pulse.

DP2: Quadrature pulse.

CAN: CAN communication activity.

SDD: Slow Down Down.

DLM: Down Level Marker (Front).

DZ: Door Zone (Front).

ULM: Up Level Marker (Front).

AUX: Sensor processor B active.

• DP1, DP2: Quadrature pulses. DP1 leads when the car is traveling up. DP2 leads when the car is traveling down. Alternately active whenever the car is in motion.

• CAN: CAN communication with landing system is active.

1-36 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

LS-RAIL Landing System

LS-RAIL Landing System

Refer to the instruction shipped with the LS-RAIL for installation instructions, MCE PN# 42-

IS-0250 The instructions will guide you through mechanical installation, including leveling magnet and terminal magnet placement.

LS-RAIL is a cartop pedestal mounted positioning system. The encoding wheel rides the face of the rail center blade, tracking position, while two sensor arrays detect 5 1/2 inch floor zone magnets mounted in the rail angles.

The system uses capacitor-stored power and non-volatile memory to retain position information in the event of a power failure, continuing to capture information for 10 seconds after power loss and storing the final reading for use after power restoration.

The LS-RAIL kit contains the positioning assembly, the required number of door zone magnets, terminal magnets, and the CAT-5 cables required to connect the sensor to the car top interface box. If ETS magnets are required, they are also included. The pedestal the assembly mounts on may be fabricated on site or an optional pedestal kit is available from MCE.

Parameter Settings

Verify touch screen Config 01, Building Setup information is correct.

Hoistway Learn

Please refer to “Landing System Learn” on page 1-46

.

Offset

All compatible controllers allow the door zone heights to be individually adjusted in 0.10 inch increments to compensate for magnet placement irregularity. Please refer to CONFIG02, Hoistway Setup.

1-37

Installation

Serial Hall and Car Call Boards

Caution

PC boards can be damaged by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use a properly grounded wrist strap when touching PC boards. Do not touch PC Boards unless you are properly grounded.

Hall Calls

Element controllers use serial hall calls. A four-wire drop from the controller provides a connection point for SC-3HN boards that in turn provide analog inputs and outputs for the hall call buttons and LEDs. Refer to the drawings package for connection instructions to your fixtures.

Figure 1.15 SC-3HN Three Input Serial Hall Call Node Board

Processor

Reset

JP5, CAN Bus termination. Place across pins

ONLY on last board connected to a wire drop.

Entry / Floor

Address

Riser Identification

ON LED, green

FLT LED, red

General Installation

All SC-3HN connections are at one end of the board. One board is installed in each hall call panel electrical box. Refer to the job prints.

1. Make connections to the hall call buttons and indicators. (See job prints.)

2. Make connections to the signal/power drop.

3. Verify floor number and door (F/R) location,

Floor Number and Front or Rear Opening on page 1-39 .

4. Verify riser assignment,

Riser Assignment on page 1-39

.

5. Last board on wire drop only: Place a jumper on JP5. All other boards: Ensure jumper

NOT placed across JP5 pins, Riser Assignment on page 1-39 .

6. Insert board in anti-static sleeves and tape closed using supplied ESD sticker.

7. Tuck bag/board into electrical box and re-install hall call.

1-38 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Serial Hall and Car Call Boards

Addressing and CAN Bus Termination Set SC-3HN addresses as shown in the job prints for the installation. Generic examples are provided below.

Riser Assignment Element supports only one hall riser.

Table 1.17 Riser Assignment by Jumper Binary Representation

1

1

1

1

JP3 JP2

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

JP1 Riser

Main A (Binary value 7) USE FOR ELEMENT.

Main B (Binary value 6)

Main C (Binary value 5)

Main D (Binary value 4)

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

Auxiliary A (Binary value 3)

Auxiliary B (Binary value 2)

Auxiliary C (Binary value 1)

Auxiliary D (Binary value 0)

Floor Number and Front or Rear Opening DIP switch SW1, switches 1 through 7 set the floor address for the board, beginning with Floor 1. Switch 8 selects Front or Rear opening (ELEMENT uses FRONT OPENINGS ONLY).

ON

SW

8

7

6

3

2

5

4

1

Floor address example = 11

OFF=FRONT, ON=REAR

64

32

16

8

4

2

1

When setting addresses, use the values silkscreened on the circuit board, not those shown on the DIP switch.

ON switch adds its value to floor address.

Baud Rate Jumper JP4 is reserved for future use to select a different CAN Bus baud rate should it become necessary. For now, the only option is to leave the JP4 jumper in place, setting baud rate to 125 kbps.

CAN Bus Termination The CAN Bus must be terminated ONLY ON THE LAST SC-

3HN connected to the wire drop (farthest board from Dispatcher).

JP5 OFF/Unterminated

All but last board

JP5 ON/Terminated

Last board on wire drop ONLY.

1-39

Installation

On Board Diagnostics Two LEDs provide diagnostic information: The ON LED

(green) and the FLT LED (red).

ON LED The ON LED reflects power/communications status.

• ON: Communications OK

• OFF: Board is not receiving power or has no software loaded.

• Blinking: Communications error - more than ten seconds have passed without a message from the group dispatcher.

(FLT) FAULT LED The FLT LED reflects the status of the analog outputs.

• ON steady: Internal fault -

• Replace board if problem persists

• OFF: No Errors detected.

• Blinking: Output overload or disconnection. Pressing the Reset button on the SC-3HN board will clear a blinking Fault LED.

• Board inventory not yet run. See

Hall Bus Inventory on page 2-20

.

• Overload: Excessive current draw. Resets when current draw is corrected and call button is pressed again.

• Not Connected: The output is on (button pressed) but nothing is connected to the UL- or DL- output. Resets when the lamp is connected and the call button is pressed again.

• Output Shorted: If short is very quick, the LED will flash. Pressing the call button for a few moments will cause the board to reboot. Resets when the short is removed and the call button is pressed again.

Inventory When all halls calls are installed and functioning properly, the system allows you to save them into memory (inventory them). In the future, when looking for a burned out

LED or a stuck switch, the same UI screen will automatically test all inventoried hall calls for

you. See Hall Bus Inventory on page 2-20 .

1-40 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Serial Hall and Car Call Boards

Serial Car Call Board

The MC-CPI-2 board, mounted in the car operating panel, converts the discrete closures from the panel buttons and switches to serial data on the CAN bus. Unused spare inputs to and outputs from these boards are set to NOT USED at the factory. If a CPI-2 board is replaced in the field or if controller software is upgraded, it is very important to check programmable CPI-2 board inputs and outputs and verify unused connections are set to NOTUSED. The CPI-2 board is also responsible for landing system control. For additional information, please refer to

page 2-35 .

Installation Instructions

1. Turn the power off at the main disconnect.

2. Mount the MC-CPI-2 board(s) inside the COP using the supplied hardware and providing sufficient clearance for the components. Verify board address,

page 1-43 .

3. CAR CALL indicator LEDs or lamps must be powered from the CC24V supply. Other lamps, PIs, and buzzers must be powered from the 24V supply. Button contacts are generally connected to Common and to their specific I/O terminal.

4. Refer to the job prints to wire the MC-CPI-2 board.

Figure 1.16 MC-CPI-2 Serial Car Operating Panel Board

1-41

Installation

Figure 1.17 CPI-2 Board Configuration

MC-CPI-2

CAN connection from

Machine Room

CAR CALL INDICATORS

USE CC24V POWER

JP3 set to the 24 position for active low inputs.

GND

RST

SW1

JP3

24

S1

SW1: See board addressing on next page.

JP1

OFF

ON

CC24V

COM

CAN

24V

IN

COM

24V

NEXT BOARD

COM

CAN from previous CPI-2 board (if any)

OMRON

CC24V

24V

COM

TERMINATION

JP2

CAN

TO I/O PER JOB PRINTS

TO I/O PER JOB PRINTS

JP2 CAN Termination. If just one board is used, this jumper must be installed. If more than one board is used, this jumper must be installed on the LAST board also. See next figure.

BUZZER

LAMP

DOB DCL

LAMPS, BUZZERS, ETC.

USE 24V POWER

1-42 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Figure 1.18 CPI-2 Interconnect

CAN FROM

MACHINE ROOM CPI #1

SHLD

CANL

CANH

Traveler

Serial Hall and Car Call Boards

CPI #2

GND

SW1

JP3

24

S1

RST

JP1

OFF

ON

GND

SW1

JP3

24

S1

RST

JP1

OFF

ON

CAN

24V

IN

COM

24V

NEXT BOARD

COM

MC-CPI-2

OMRON

CC24V

24V

COM

TERMINATION

JP2

CAN CAN

24V

IN

COM

24V

NEXT BOARD

COM

MC-CPI-2

OMRON

CC24V

24V

COM

TERMINATION

JP2

CAN

2 feet CAN Cable between CPI Boards

JP2 JP2

Board address switches: Four-position DIP switch SW1 provides a unique address for each CPI-2 board (you should never have two CPI-2 boards with the same SW1 setting).

SW 1 CPI-2 Addresses

Board SW1

1 Off

2

3

4

On

Off

On

SW2

Off

Off

On

On

SW3

Off

Off

Off

Off

• SW1, switch 4, determines CAN baud rate:

• ON: 500k - used if board is mounted INSIDE the Element controller

• OFF: 250k - default setting; use with board mounted in COP or on car

Lanterns and PIs

Install and set up lanterns and position indicators as shown in the job prints and as directed in the literature accompanying the fixture.

1-43

Installation

Door Operator

Door operators interface to the SCE-CPU, SCE-HVI, and MC-CPI-2 boards. Door operator connections are shown in the prints for the specific job. Separate documentation is also included with the door operator itself. Several door operators are supported.

• MCE Universal door control: Refer to job prints.

• MCE SmarTraq harmonic: See job prints and MCE Manual 42-02-D008 shipped with door operator.

• GAL MOVFR or MOD: See job prints and GAL Instruction shipped with door operator.

Each door operator is shipped with installation instructions. Use these installation instructions and the prints for the individual job to install the door operator.

Door Position Monitor Switch

If you are in a jurisdiction where ASME A17.1 - 1996 or later is being enforced, Door Position

Monitor switch(es) connected to the DPM input must be added to monitor the position of the closed doors. This must be a separate physical limit switch that makes up approximately 1 to 2 inches before the doors lock. The DPM switch connects to a CPI-2 board usually located on the cartop or in the COP enclosure. See your job prints.

Load Weigher

For customer provided load weighers, the Element controller provides the following discrete inputs:

• Load Light Input - When activated the elevator will only allow the number of car calls specified by the Light Load Car Call Limit parameter to be registered. If more are registered, all car calls are canceled. A discrete load weigher contact is typically wired to this input, indicating that a very minimal passenger load exists in the car. The controller uses this input as an anti nuisance tool by limiting the number of car calls that may be placed while this input is active.

• Load Disp - This input indicates that the car is loaded to a point at which it will prepare to leave the lobby (begin closing doors).

• Load Heavy - This input indicates that the car is loaded to the point at which it should no longer accept hall call assignments (heavy load bypass). A “discrete” load weigher contact is typically wired to this input, usually indicating that the load is 75%-80% of full load. The controller uses this input to temporarily bypass hall calls to avoid overload.

• Load Over - While the car is stopped at a landing with the doors open, activation of this input will hold the doors open until the overload condition is cleared. Fire service overrides Load Over.

• Load Over2 - (Over 125% of Full Load) While the car is stopped at a landing with the doors open, activation of this input will hold the doors open until the overload condition is cleared. Fire service does not override Load Over2.

1-44 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Elevator Adjustment

Traction Elevator Adjustment

Controller and drive parameters are set at the factory according to the requirements for the job site. Each controller is accompanied by a final configuration document for the controller and the drive respectively.

Caution

Element Contract Speed should not be changed from the actual car contract speed setting

(Config 02/System Control Parameters/Contract Speed) and must match the Magnetek drive A1 Contract Speed Setting or KEB US06 Contract Speed Setting. If you need to slow the car for testing, use the Element Config02/System Control Parameters/High Speed setting.

Counterweight Position

1. On Inspection operation, run the car until the counterweight is directly adjacent to the car in the hoistway.

2. Verify car position on the Home screen.

3. In the CONFIG 02, Hoistway Setup menu, set Counterweight position to the observed height.

Brake Coordination

1. Verify that the machine brake has been set to hold 125% of load.

2. Adjust speed pick delay parameter CONFIG 02, SYSTEM CONTROL PARAMETERS so that the brake is fully picked just as the motor first spins. The goal is to avoid spinning the motor before the brake is picked but not to introduce so much delay that rollback occurs.

1-45

Installation

Landing System Learn

After installing the leveling and terminal magnets and setting step up/step down distances, you will need to perform a learn operation to learn floor and terminal positions. If floor level magnets have not been positioned accurately enough, any offset can be adjusted in software (+/- 1 inch).

1. Place car on Test and Machine Room Inspection using switches on SCE-CPU.

2. Set the FLT BYPASS jumper in the BYPASS position.

3. Select the UTILS menu. Select CONSTRUCT AND BYPASS FAULTS.

4. Select AUTOMATIC FAULT BYPASS DISABLED; press OK to ENABLE. Press EXIT.

Faults are now bypassed.

5. Move car on inspection to about six (6) or more inches above bottom terminal landing.

6. Select LANDING SYSTEM UTILITIES. Select LANDING SYSTEM LEARN. Press

LEARN.

7. Set Machine Room Inspection switch to NORM. The screen will display FINDING BOT-

TOM, followed by BOTTOM FOUND. The car will then begin to run up the hoistway.

During the run, the screen will display LEARNING. Once the top floor is learned the screen will display FINALIZING, followed by STORING HOISTWAY, and finally DONE STORING HOIST-

WAY.

8. Press DONE. Press EXIT. Press EXIT on the following screens until the UTILS home menu appears

9. Select CONSTRUCT AND BYPASS FAULTS. Press AUTOMATIC FAULT BYPASS

ENABLED. Press OK to disable fault bypass.

10. Move the FAULT BYPASS jumper to the NORM position. Faults are no longer bypassed.

Tuning

For the best possible control through the speed range, the drive may need to be tuned to the characteristics of the motor according to the instructions in the drive manual.

Magnetek HPV 900 Series 2

Refer to the Appendix of the Magnetek drive manual and follow the Adaptive Tune instructions provided.

KEB F5

Refer to Motor Learn in the KEB F5, v3.21 manual.

1-46 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Elevator Adjustment

Drive Response

Depending on how the drive is tuned, the amount of lag between the commanded speed and drive response can vary. As a result, as the drive is adjusted, the Profile Advance parameter

(CONFIG 02/SYSTEM CONTROL PARAMETERS) will need to be changed as well. Use the information below along with the information in the figure

Response Adjustment on page 1-48

, and the tuning instructions following the figure to make these adjustment.

• If lag delay is insufficient, the elevator will plow into a landing. The acceleration and jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be greater than profile values indicate.

• If lag delay is excessive, the elevator will drag into a landing. The acceleration and jerk rate during deceleration to a landing will be less than profile values indicate. In addition, a discontinuity in the profile will occur during the transition from acceleration to deceleration for movement between floors where a stabilized speed (contract speed) is not reached

(short runs).

• To adjust lag delay:

• Set drive analog output 1 to output the Speed Command (KEB LA31=3, Magnetek C4 submenu, Analog Output 1, Speed Command).

• Observe the commanded speed on an oscilloscope. Perform one-floor-run movement and observe the peak acceleration transitioning to peak deceleration as the elevator reaches its peak speed (below contract speed). This transition should have no vertical discontinuity (too much lag delay). (b) This transition adjustment is only valid when the elevator is unable to reach contract speed for the profile under normal operation.

Adjust lag delay until the vertical discontinuity is eliminated.

• KEB/TorqMAX: Generally, the Profile Advance (CONFIG 02/SYSTEM CONTROL

PARAMETERS) will be within 50 to 150 milliseconds.

• Magnetek: Generally, the Profile Advance (CONFIG 02/SYSTEM CONTROL PARAME-

TERS) will be within the following range (in milliseconds):

1-47

Installation

Figure 1.19 Response Adjustment

(a)

(b) (c) (d)

Velocity and Acceleration: (a) profile at contract speed; (b) insufficient lag compensation with profile at less than contract speed; (c) excessive lag compensation with profile at less than contract speed; (d) optimum lag compensation with profile at less than contract speed.

Tuning

1. For initial setup, set the Profile Advance parameter to 1 divided by response.

2. Depending upon drive tuning, the leveling distance may have to be generous to allow the elevator speed to completely transition to the requested leveling speed. for initial use, set the Leveling Distance parameter (SYSTEM CONTROL PARAMETERS) to 2.0 inches. (Once the drive is tuned, this may be set to a more optimum value.)

3. Depending on drive tuning, the transition from leveling speed to zero speed may be sluggish. For initial use, set Auto/Norm Slew Rate (SYSTEM CONTROL PARAME-

TERS) to 2.0 ft/s2 or greater. (Once the drive is tuned, this may be set to a more optimum value.)

S-Curve

1. Make reference runs on TEST mode at contract speed in the middle of the hoistway to avoid limits.

2. Adjust the S-Curve through the CONFIG 02, S-CURVE menu to achieve desired acceler-

ation/deceleration and jerk rates. Please refer to “S-Curve” on page 2-12 .

3. Place calls to various floors and observe.

4. Floor level positions may be adjusted through the CONFIG 02, Hoistway setup menu.

Floor Offset adjustments in the + direction “raise the floor.” Floor Offset adjustments in the - direction “lower the floor.”

1-48 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Elevator Adjustment

One Floor Run

1. Run the elevator on Inspection between landings and verify that it moves properly.

2. Near a landing, take the elevator off Inspection and verify that it corrects to a landing and stops properly.

3. Make a one floor run and observe that the car levels accurately.

Contract Speed Operation

Now that the car is running on automatic operation it is time to adjust for contract speed.

1. Run the elevator between landings. Verify that it moves properly. Observe starting and stopping properties.

2. Increase the number of landings travelled until the car reaches contract speed. Adjust drive if required.

3. Place car on Normal operation and place a call to the top terminal. The car must land without a fault.

4. Place a call to the bottom terminal. The car must land without a fault.

Magnetek

While observing the SPD: display on the touch screen, set a multi-floor call and adjust drive parameter A1 CONTRACT MTR SPD until the car velocity matches the setting under CONFIG

02/SYSTEM CONTROL PARAMETERS/CONTRACT SPEED. Increasing the drive parameter will result in a faster moving car.

KEB

While observing the SPD: display on the touch screen, set a multi-floor call and adjust drive parameter LN02 until car velocity matches the setting under CONFIG 02/SYSTEM CONTROL

PARAMETERS/CONTRACT SPEED.

Relevel Operation

On Inspection, move the car to the bottom landing in the leveling zone but not level. Take the car off Inspection and observe that it re-levels into the landing. If the car attempts to re-level but cannot:

1. If the car attempts to relevel but cannot:

• Adjust Leveling speed CONFIG 02, SYSTEM CONTROL PARAMETERS to get the car to move.

• Check that the car is not opening the down final limit.

2. If a fault code is displayed, troubleshoot and correct the fault.

3. Verify that the position indicator matches the car position.

1-49

Installation

Terminal Switch Configuration

The Element controller’s “Terminal Switch Learn” can be used to help determine optimal switch or magnet placement for physical switches or to configure virtual switches. Before positioning physical ETS/ETSL switches in the hoistway or ETS-LS magnets on the tape or rail, configure the controller with virtual ETS switches (CONFIG02 > ETS Switches). Then using (UTIL

> LANDING SYSTEM UTILITIES > TERMINAL SWITCH LEARN), enter the desired percentage of rated car speed at which the car should be traveling when each switch is encountered.

Follow on-screen instructions for learning terminal switch configuration.

In the following table, enter the values generated for each of the switches and place physical switches and/or magnets accordingly. Where physical switches and/or landing system magnets are used for ETS/ETS-LS/ETSL, these will need to be enabled in the CONFIG02 > ETS switch screen and the Terminal Switch Learn process will need to be repeated before the Safety Tests are done and the car is turned over.

Note: For reduced stroke buffers, the Terminal Switch Learn process will need to be done twice to generate recommended distances and speeds for both ETS magnets on the landing system tape (ETS-LS) and ETSL cam-actuated switches in the hoistway. We recommend ETSL learn first, followed by ETS learn.

Table 1.18 Recommended Terminal Switch Configuration Calculation

Caution: When performing the ETSLD test, be sure that the speed entered for the test [UTILS > SAFETY TESTS >

COMLIANCE TESTING > SPEED] does not exceed the rated buffer speed.

SWITCH” and desired percentage of car speed when switch is actuated

DISTANCE (in.) LEARNED SPEED DELTA SPEED (fpm) TEST SPEED (fpm)

Choose the lesser distance (top or bottom) from the terminal landing for

“switch” placement

C hoose the greater learned speed (up or down)

These are typically the same, but choose the lesser where there is a difference.

A dd the learned speed

+ delta speed

+ 5 fpm

USL1 Distance/

DSL1 Distance

USL1 Speed/

DSL1 Speed

USL1 Delta-L Speed/

DSL1 Delta-L Speed

USL1-L Test Speed/

DSL1-L Test Speed NTS1

____%

(Closest switch to terminal landing)

USL1 Delta-H Speed/

DSL1 Delta-H Speed

USL1-H Test Speed/

DSL1-H Test Speed

USL2 Distance/

DSL2 Distance

USL2 Speed/

DSL2 Speed

USL2 Delta-L Speed/

DSL2 Delta-L Speed

USL2-L Test Speed/

DSL2-L Test Speed

NTS2

____% USL2 Delta-H Speed/

DSL2 Delta-H Speed

USL2-H Test Speed/

DSL2-H Test Speed

ETS

____%

(90-95%)

UETS Distance/

DETS Distance

UETS Speed/

DETS Speed*

UETS Delta Speed/

DETS Delta Speed

UETS Test Speed/

DETS Test Speed

ETSL**

____%

UETS Distance/

DETS Distance

UETS Speed/

DETS Speed

UETS Delta Speed/

DETS Delta Speed

UETS Test Speed/

DETS Test Speed

* Where magnets are placed on the tape as an ETS backup, manually enter the UETS/DETS speed in the

CONFIG 02 > ETS Switches > U/DETS-LS OVERSPEED box.

** For reduced stroke buffers only. ETSL % = ETS % x Rated Buffer Speed/Rated Car Speed

1-50 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Terminal Switch Configuration

Terminal Switch Learn

1. Bring the car to the bottom landing. Place it on Test mode.

2. In the CONFIG 02 menu, verify that ETS, NTS1, and NTS2 switch Virtual/Physical/Disabled settings are correct per your configuration and contract speed switch requirements.

3. In the UTILS menu, select Landing System Utilities.

4. Select Terminal Switch Learn.

5. Follow on-screen instructions.

6. Place calls to floors throughout the building. Verify proper landing and leveling from both directions.

Adjustment Problems

Performance and Ride Quality

Learning system inertia can provide better dynamic performance and better ride quality.

KEB

1. With a balanced load in the car, bring the elevator to the middle of the hoistway. On

Inspection, move the car first up, then down. Motor torque should be equal but in the opposite direction (see drive Home/Diag/Screen #3).

2. Move the car to the bottom landing. Set drive LL10 to Start to begin the inertia learn procedure (Home/Diag/Tune Parameters).

3. Run the car at full contract speed from the bottom landing to the top landing and then back down to the bottom landing. Repeat the run from bottom to top and then top to bottom.

4. After four runs, the drive will automatically calculate the inertia value based on the average of the four runs. The value will be saved on the drive Home/Prog/Control Settings/

LC41 parameter.

5. Once inertia has been learned, LC02, LC42, LC43, and LC44 parameters can be adjusted. (Home/Prog/Control Settings)

Magnetek

1. To perform this procedure, you will need to run the car at full contract speed with a balanced load.

• Est Inertia can be viewed on the drive D1 Elevator Data menu.

• Inertia can be adjusted on the drive A1 Drive menu.

2. Refer to Using the Software to Estimate the System’s Inertia in the appendix of the Magnetek HPV AC Drive Technical Manual and follow that procedure.

3. With system inertia properly adjusted, final tuning of the speed regulator can be performed. The Response parameter on the drive A1 Drive Menu is one parameter that can be used to adjust the speed regulator. Please see the Magnetek HPV AC Drive Technical

Manual for tuning/adjustment procedures.

1-51

Installation

Speed Changes Felt Excessively in Car

During high speed, if the speed change from accel to high speed or from high speed to decel can be felt excessively in the car:

• MAGNETEK: Consider Estimation of System Inertia, A0/A1 Response, A0/A1 Inner Loop

Xover, A0/A1 Gain Reduce Mult, and A1/A0 Gain Chng Level.

• KEB: Consider Inertia Learn.

• Check Jerk settings. See

S-Curve on page 2-12.

Lower values result in smoother transitions.

Car Overshoots or Motor Overload/Overvolt

• Refer to drive manual for error definition and troubleshooting instructions

• Check counterweighting is correct.

• Decrease Standard Acceleration, Standard Deceleration, Standard Roll Jerk, and Standard

Stop Jerk.

• Increase drive gains, Magnetek A0/A1 RESPONSE, KEB LC03, LC04, LC08, LC09.

• Shut off power. Wait 1 minute to drain DC voltage from dynamic braking circuit. Verify no

DC voltage with voltmeter.

• Check value of braking resistance (RB resistors). Check brake circuit connections and brake resistor slip rings. (Approximately 3 times the measured brake coil resistance is a good starting point.)

Car Oscillates at Contract Speed

• Verify all motor parameters correctly set and encoder mounted securely (no vibration).

• Magnetek: Verify Estimation of System Inertia, A0/A1 Inner Loop Xover, A0/A1 Gain

Reduce Mult, and A0/A1 Gain Chng Level. Verify A0/A1 Response is not set too high.

• KEB: Verify LC03, LC04, LC08, and LC09 are not set too high.

Electrical Noise

If the motor makes excessive electrical noise or draws higher than normal current:

1. Check Encoder Polarity.

2. Check KEB LE04 Encoder 1 Sample Rate (Home/Prog/Encoder). Try changing it from 4 to 8 or from 8 to 16.

3. Check KEB LC44. Try changing to a value other than 0 (Home/Prog/Control Settings).

4. Verify traction sheave diameter and correct entry in drive parameters.

5. Verify machine gear reduction ratio and correct entry in drive parameters.

6. Verify rated motor speed and correct entry in drive parameters.

7. Verify acceleration and deceleration integral and proportional gain drive settings.

1-52 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Duplex Operation

Duplex Operation

For duplex operation, serial hall calls are connected to both cars as shown in the job prints. One car is selected to be the master dispatcher; the other is selected to be a local.

1. For the car selected as the Dispatcher, set CONFIG 02, System Control Parameters, Primary Dispatcher to YES.

2. For the other car, set Primary Dispatcher to NO.

Interconnect

Make all connections as shown in the prints for the job.

Duplex Elevator Hall Call CAN3 Interconnect

SCE-CPU

A B

JP12

SCE-CPU

A B

JP12

Terminate second elevator

JP12 jumper in A position

CAN3 to Hall Calls

Power Phasing

When cars are paired for duplex operation, input power phasing to the two must match.

1. Connect a multimeter, set for AC voltage, between a 2 Bus terminal on one controller and a 2 Bus terminal on the second controller. If the meter reads close to zero (0) volts, the two are in phase. If not:

• Swap two of the L1/L2/L3 inputs on one car and repeat step 1.

1-53

Installation

Traction Acceptance Tests

The UTILS, Safety Test menu will guide you through test instructions for those tests for which automated assistance is pertinent. See

page 1-56 .

Manual Tests

Manual tests include:

• Safety string test

• Motor contactor proofing

• Brake contactor proofing, page 1-55

• Ascending car overspeed,

page 1-55

• Unintended motion, page 1-55

Safety String Test

This test verifies the Safety String is working correctly.

SAFH Safety String Test

1. Remove the wire from SCE-HVI board terminal SAFH or activate any safety device in the string.

2. The message SAFH LOW will appear on the display.

3. Verify that the car cannot be run.

4. Reinstall the wire.

SAFC Safety String Test

1. Remove the wire from SCE-HVI board terminal SAFC or activate any safety device in the string.

2. The message STOP SW ON will appear on the display.

3. Verify that the car cannot be run.

4. Reinstall the wire.

Motor Contactor Proofing Test

This test simulates a stuck motor contactor. The test should be performed with the car stopped and with the car in motion. Once the fault is generated, the car should not be allowed to move until the contactor is unstuck.

Car Stopped at Floor This test is performed with the car stopped at a floor.

1. Use a non-metallic object to activate the PM contactor.

2. Observe that the car will not run. Touch screen displays “PMP failed to turn off”.

Car in Motion The car is in motion when this test is performed.

1. Place a call.

2. Once the car is in motion, use a non-metallic object to activate and hold the PM contactor “on”.

3. After the car stops at the designated floor, verify that it will not continue to run.

1-54 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Acceptance Tests

Brake Contactor Proofing Test

This test simulates a stuck brake contactor. The test should be performed with the car stopped and with the car in motion. Once the fault is generated the car should not be allowed to move until the contactor is unstuck.

Car Stopped at Floor This test is performed with the car stopped at a floor.

1. Use a non-metallic object to activate the BR contactor.

2. Verify that the car will not run. Touch screen displays “BRP failed to turn off” and

“BROM failed to turn off.”

Car in Motion The car is in motion when this test is performed.

1. Place a call.

2. Once the car is in motion, use a non-metallic object to activate and hold the BR contactor “on.”

3. After the car stops at the designated floor, verify that the car will not continue to run. (A

UIM, unintended motion fault, may occur if the car drifts far enough.

Ascending Car Overspeed Test

The mechanic must determine appropriate weight, if any, to be placed in the car for this test.

1. Bring the empty car to the bottom floor with car and hoistway doors closed and locked.

2. Observe car speed on the touch screen HOME screen and stand by to engage brake if governor overspeed switch fails to open.

3. Use your preferred method to mechanically release the machine brake. The car will start to move up the hoistway.

4. When the governor overspeed switch opens, the emergency brake will engage, stop, and hold the car.

5. With power off, reset the governor overspeed switch. With power on, and the car on

Machine Room Inspection, reset the emergency brake: SCE-CPU board- Press/hold

UIM RST for 8 seconds; Press FLT RST.

Emergency Brake Test - Unintended Motion, Rope Brake

This test verifies that moving the car away from a landing with both the car and Hoistway doors open (termed “Unintended motion”) will cause the Emergency Brake (Rope Gripper) to be deployed and that such deployment will stop the elevator. This test demonstrates that the emergency brake will stop the car within 48” from floor level if the car drifts from the floor.

1. For safety, station a mechanic at the landing where the test is to be performed.

2. Load the car as required (100% or 125% of load). Place barricades to prevent entry.

3. Bring the car to the landing away from the terminals and place on TEST service.

4. Use your preferred method to mechanically release the machine brake.

5. As the car moves away from the floor, observe that the emergency brake stops and holds the car within 48 inches (122 cm) of floor level.

6. To restore normal operation, verify doors are closed, place car on Inspection and press the UIM RESET button on the SCE-CPU board for a minimum of 8 seconds until the emergency brake resets. Press FLT RST on the SCE-CPU board.

7. When testing is complete, make sure that all appropriate data has been properly documented.

1-55

Installation

Automated Tests

Automated tests are accessed through the UTILS menu, SAFETY TESTS screen. Once you select

SAFETY TESTS, a COMPLIANCE TESTING button appears. Press this button and you will be asked to select a Test Type and the speed at which the test will be conducted.

Danger

When running automated terminal/slowdown switch tests, be aware that the speed you have selected must be sufficient to trip the unit under test. Switches not being tested are disarmed so, if the unit under test does not trip, the elevator will continue with only the physical final limit providing protection. Be prepared to remove power if the unit under test does not trip.

When you have selected Test Type and Speed, click NEXT and follow on-screen instructions to complete the selected test. If you are running tests that do not incorporate emergency or terminal slowdowns, stay well away from them.

Note

Once a compliance test has been “armed” you may exit the test screen and go to the home screen to observe car speed, position, etc. while the test is executing.

Car/cwt safety

1. Electrical governor overspeed switch must be physically bypassed.

2. On Test operation, move car to starting position.

3. Place car on Machine Room inspection.

4. Place Flt Bypass jumper in Bypass position.

5. Go to Utils/Construct and Bypass Faults. Select Construct/Fault Bypass Disabled; enable bypass, press OK. Press EXIT.

6. Select Utils/Safety Tests/Compliance Testing.

7. Select test and speed (Safety Rated + 10 FPM).

8. Press Next. Follow on-screen instructions.

Additional:

• To break traction, continue to run on Inspection in direction of test.

On Completion:

• Place Flt Bypass jumper in NORM position.

• Use touch screen to exit Compliance testing.

• Use touch screen to disable Construct/Fault Bypass.

1-56 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Acceptance Tests

Car/cwt buffer

1. Final limit switch must be physically bypassed.

2. On Test operation, move car to starting position.

3. Place car on Machine Room inspection.

4. Place Flt Bypass jumper in Bypass position.

5. Go to Utils/Construct and Bypass Faults. Select Construct/Fault Bypass Disabled; enable bypass, press OK. Press EXIT.

6. Select Utils/Safety Tests/Compliance Testing.

7. Select test and speed (Contract or Rated Buffer).

8. Press Next. Follow on-screen instructions.

Additional:

• To break traction, continue to run on Inspection in direction of test.

On Completion:

• Place Flt Bypass jumper in NORM position.

• Use touch screen to exit Compliance testing.

• Use touch screen to disable Construct/Fault Bypass.

Electrical governor

1. On Test operation, move car to starting position.

2. Place car on Machine Room inspection.

3. Place Flt Bypass jumper in Bypass position.

4. Go to Utils/Construct and Bypass Faults. Select Construct/Fault Bypass Disabled; enable bypass, press OK. Press EXIT.

5. Select Utils/Safety Tests/Compliance Testing.

6. Select test and speed (rated speed of switch + 10 FPM).

7. Press Next. Follow on-screen instructions.

On Completion:

• Place Flt Bypass jumper in NORM position.

• Use touch screen to exit Compliance testing.

• Use touch screen to disable Construct/Fault Bypass.

Inspection overspeed

1. On Test operation, move car to starting position.

2. Place car on Machine Room inspection.

3. Select Utils/Safety Tests/Compliance Testing.

4. Select test and speed (Inspection Overspeed [Config02/System Control] + 10 FPM).

5. Press Next. Follow on-screen instructions.

On Completion:

• Use touch screen to exit Compliance testing.

1-57

Installation

Contract overspeed

1. On Test operation, move car to starting position.

2. Place car on Machine Room inspection.

3. Select Utils/Safety Tests/Compliance Testing.

4. Select test and speed (Contract Overspeed [Config02/System Control] + 10 FPM).

5. Press Next. Follow on-screen instructions.

On Completion:

• Use touch screen to exit Compliance testing.

Switch Overspeed Tests

Table 1.19 Recommended Terminal Switch Configuration

When performing the ETSLD test, be sure that the speed entered for the test [UTILS→SAFETY TESTS→COMPLIANCE

TESTING→SPEED] does not exceed the rated buffer speed.

“SWITCH” and desired percentage of car speed when switch is actuated

NTS1

____%

(Closest switch to terminal landing)

DISTANCE (in.)

Choose the lesser distance (top or bottom) from the terminal landing for the “switch”

USL1 Distance/

DSL1 Distance

LEARNED SPEED DELTA SPEED (fpm) TEST SPEED (fpm)

Choose the These are typically Add the learned greater learned speed (up or down) the same, but choose the lesser where there is a difference.

speed + delta speed

+ 5 fpm

USL1 Speed/

DSL1 Speed

USL1 Delta-L Speed/

DSL1 Delta-L Speed

USL1-L Test Speed/

DSL1-L Test Speed

USL1 Delta-H Speed/

DSL1 Delta-H Speed

USL1-H Test Speed/

DSL1-H Test Speed

NTS2

____%

USL2 Distance/

DSL2 Distance

USL2 Speed/

DSL2 Speed

USL2 Delta-L Speed/

DSL2 Delta-L Speed

USL2-L Test Speed/

DSL2-L Test Speed

ETS

____%

(90-95%)

ETSL**

____%

UETS Distance/

DETS Distance

UETS Distance/

DETS Distance

UETS Speed/

DETS Speed*

UETS Speed/

DETS Speed

USL2 Delta-H Speed/

DSL2 Delta-H Speed

USL2-H Test Speed/

DSL2-H Test Speed

UETS Delta Speed/

DETS Delta Speed

UETS Delta Speed/

DETS Delta Speed

UETS Test Speed/

DETS Test Speed

UETS Test Speed/

DETS Test Speed

*Where magnets are placed on the tape as an ETS backup, manually enter the UETS/DETS speed in the CON-

FIG 02 ETS Switches U/DETS-LS OVERSPEED box.

**For reduced stroke buffers only. ETSL % = ETS % x Rated Buffer Speed/Rated Car Speed

1-58 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Traction Acceptance Tests

• ETS overspeed

• Test should be run at UETS/DETS learned speed + UETS/DETS delta speed + 5FPM

(CONFIG02/ETS Switches)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• ETSL overspeed

• Test should be run at ETSL Overspeed +5 FPM (CONFIG 02/ETS Switches)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• NTS1 Lower overspeed

• Tests the lower overspeed reaction (emergency slowdown then correction speed)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• Test should be run at learned speed of U/DNTS1 + Delta Low Speed + 5 FPM (CONFIG

02/NTS1 Switches)

• NTS1 Upper overspeed

• Tests the upper overspeed reaction (emergency stop then correction speed)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• Test should be run at learned speed of U/DNTS1 + Delta High Speed + 5 FPM (CON-

FIG 02/NTS1 Switches)

• NTS2 Lower overspeed

• Tests the lower overspeed reaction (emergency slowdown then correction speed)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• Test should be run at learned speed of U/DNTS2 + Delta Low Speed + 5 FPM (CON-

FIG 02/NTS2Switches)

• NTS2 Upper overspeed

• Tests the upper overspeed reaction (emergency stop then correction speed)

• Test will be run in TEST mode

• Test should be run at learned speed of U/DNTS2 + Delta High Speed + 5 FPM (CON-

FIG 02/NTS2 Switches)

1-59

Installation

Passcode

(If applicable.) Until a valid passcode is entered and saved, the controller will not answer hall calls. If a valid passcode has not been obtained and entered for the job:

1. Contact MCE Customer Service to obtain a passcode.

2. In the touch screen CONFIG 01/JOB INFO AND LABELS, you will see:

• PASSCODE: PASSCODE ACTIVE

3. Press PASSCODE ACTIVE to open an entry screen.

4. Key in the passcode. Press ENTER.

5. The CONFIG 01 screen will display “PASSCODE VALID.” Press SAVE.

6. The display will change to:

• PASSCODE: PASSCODE CLEAR

7. The controller will now respond to hall calls.

Until the passcode is cleared, a status message: PASSCODE ENABLED on the HOME screen will alert you to the need.

1-60 Manual # 42-02-2P26

Configuration and Troubleshooting

In this Section

This section contains descriptions of Element parameters, web access instructions, and troubleshooting information:

• Using the Touch Screen, page 2-2

• Menu Tree,

page 2-4

• Screen Descriptions,

page 2-5

• Spare Inputs, page 2-21

• Spare Outputs, page 2-22

• Acronyms, page 2-23

• Web Browser Access, page 2-29

• USB Parameter Transfer,

page 2-29

• Event Log Archive/eMail,

page 2-30

• Troubleshooting,

page 2-31

• Board Descriptions,

page 2-34

• System Software Update,

page 2-43 .

• Event Descriptions, page 2-52

• Event Log Viewing,

page 2-91

2-1

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Using the Touch Screen/OBD

Element controls use a touchscreen user interface. The initial (and default) display is the Home

Display. See “Home Screen” on page 1- 11.

Screens are arranged in “order of use” with the Home screen first, followed by configuration screens, utility screens, and then diagnostics oriented screens.

Home

Figure 2.1 Home Display Screen

Menu Tabs highlighted when selected

Scrolling control highlighted if additional parameters/ selections are available in this direction

On the Home display screen, “tabs” to the right of the window show what additional adjustment, control, and diagnostic screens are available. Up and Down arrows scroll through the tabs. To access a screen, simply touch the associated tab.

• When activated, main screens with many selections open to a sub-screen selection menu.

• To select/set a particular feature, simply touch it.

• If Yes/No, it will change from one state to the other.

• If there are more than two possible settings, a list will appear.

• If a time or value may be set, a numeric entry screen will open.

• The Save button allows you to save changes. (Save and Exit.)

• The Exit button allows you to exit the screen. Any unsaved changes will be ignored.

• Undo: Undo action but remain in menu.

We recommend you take a few minutes to become familiar with the touch screen interface. You will find that operation is simple and predictable. See additional screen representations on the next page.

Note

Screen freeze: If the screen should ever freeze or “lock up,” press RSTA on the SCE-CPU board.

2-2 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Figure 2.2 Parameter Selection Screen

Using the Touch Screen/OBD

Press and slide to move through multiple screens.

Tap the arrows to move one screen at a time. Press and hold to move continuously.

Figure 2.3 Input/Output Assignment

Tap on the input or output to be configured.

To reassign an already used input:

• Reassign input to NOT USED, press OK.

• Assign the new function, press OK.

• Press Save.

Tap on the input/output name and use scroll arrows or slider to move through potential input/ output assignments. Note blue outline when item is selected.

Tap on the input/output location and use scroll arrows or slider to move through potential location assignments. Note blue outline when item is selected.

2-3

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Figure 2.4 Menu Tree

HOME CONFIG 01 CONFIG 02 CONFIG 03

Building Setup

Job Info and Labels

Elevator Features

Configure Spare Inputs

System Timers

Configure Spare Outputs

UTILS

Hoistway Setup

NTS2 Switches

ETS Switches

S-Curve

NTS1 Switches

System Control Parameters

SYSTEM IO

File Transfer

Register Calls

Construct and Bypass Faults

Safety Tests

Date and Time

Landing System Utilities

System Inputs

System Outputs

Progammed Inputs

Programmed Outputs

Main CPI (0) I/O’s

Aux CPI (2) I/O’s

SPA DIAG SPB DIAG

SPB Flags

SPB Numeric

SPB Inputs

SPB Outputs

SPA Flags

SPA Numeric

SPA Motion Numeric

Emerg Pwr & Earthquake

Door Dwell Times

Itinerary Manager

STATUS

INFO

CPU Bus Com

Hall Bus Inventory

CAN Bus Viewer

Version Information

Other Car Settings

Address Diagnostics

STATS

ACTION

INFO

Car Calls Canceled..

Hall Calls Canceled..

Door Open..

Door Close..

Prohibit Run / Start..

.... due to

SCOPE

Building Security

Emergency Power

Recall Switches

Network Settings

SYSTEM

DIAG

Motion IO

Event Log

Door Control

Diagnostics Tree

Landing System

Active Events

SPC DIAG

SPC Flags

SPC Numeric

SPC Inputs

SPC Outputs

Group to Car Data

Car to Group Data

PLD DIAG

PLD Flags

PLD Numeric

PLD Inputs

PLD Outputs

Maintenance

Hourly

View Scope

Landing System

System Inputs

Program Inputs

System Outputs

Program Outputs

Shortcuts

• Touch the elevator on the Home screen to go to call registration.

• Touch the upper left corner on the Register Calls screen to return to the Home screen.

• Touch inside the Mode of Operation, Faults & Safety, or System Status areas of the Home screen to go to a screen relevant to obtaining additional information.

• Touch the home icon in upper left corner to return to the Home screen.

2-4 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Screen Descriptions

Experiment with the touchscreen to familiarize yourself with navigation and content. If an abbreviation is not clear, please see

Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations on page 2-

23 .)

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

HOME

CONFIG 01

Subtab Description

N/A

See “Home Screen” on page

1- 11.

Displays critical status information for operation.

- Operating Mode

- Fault text if a fault is active

- Safety string complete indicator

- Active fault indicator

- Locks string complete indicator

- CPU health indicator

- Bus status

- System communication

- Clock and date display

- Car and Hall call in service status

- Dispatcher (on dispatched car “Disp ID: nn” will appear where “nn” is the ID of the dispatching car, Duplex only)

Simplex will appear for single self-dispatching car.

- Car door position

- Current floor

- Intended direction of travel

- Destination floor

Building Setup

Job Info and Labels

- Controller Type, Hydraulic/Traction

- Number of Cars (1 Simplex, 2 Duplex)

- Car ID

- Bottom Floor (served)

- Top Floor (served)

- Floor Openings (per floor, Front/None)

- Lobby Floor

- Egress Floor (building exit floor)

- Fire Code (

page 1-5 )

- Main Fire Floor

- Alt Fire Floor

- Flood Floor (lowest served if Flood input active)

- Landing System Type, LS-EDGE or LS-RAIL

- Primary Parking Floor

- Primary Parking Door Operation

- Secondary Parking Floor

- Secondary Parking Door Operation

- Car Panel Inspection: When present (Yes), SCE-CPU inputs ICEN/IN1, ICPU/IN2, and ICPD/IN3 may only be used as Car Panel Inspection inputs.

- Hoistway Access: Top, Bottom, or Both.

- EMS Floor: Set the floor number at which the EMS call to floor input is located.

- Passcode. See Passcode on page 1-60 .

- SCE CPU Serial Number (Read Only)

- Job Department and Year

- Job Number

- Job Name

- Car Label

- Floor Label, per floor

2-5

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 01

Subtab

Elevator Features

Description

- Capture Floor (Pretest Operation calls car to this floor).

See Capture for Test, page 1-8.

- Capture Door Operation (Doors Closed/Open Doors/

Cycle Doors): Door behavior at capture floor.

- Bypass Stuck PHE (Yes/No): When enabled, causes controller to ignore PHE (Photo Eye) input and close the doors after the Stuck PHE Timer elapses.

- Bypass Stuck SE (Yes/No): When enabled, causes controller to ignore SE(Safety Edge) input and close the doors after the Stuck SE timer elapses.

- Bypass Stuck DOB (Yes/No): When enabled, causes controller to ignore DOB (Door Open Button) input and close doors after the Stuck DOB or TOS timer elapses.

- PHE Antinuisance (Photo Eye Antinuisance - 00 - 10)

Maximum number of car calls served without photo eye interruption before all car calls are canceled.

- LLI Antinuisance (Light Load Antinuisance - 00 - 10)

Maximum number of car calls registered with load light input active.

- CCC Reversal (Yes/No)

If Yes, cancel any car calls in the previous direction when the car reverses direction.

- CCC Behind Car (Yes/No)

If Yes, cancel all car calls entered in the opposite direction of current or upcoming direction of travel.

Pre-Open Doors (Yes/No)

If Yes, doors will begin opening three inches before floor level.

- Nudging (Yes/No)

If Yes, enables nudging operation when doors are prevented from closing.

- DLK Direction Preference (Yes/No)

If Yes, car maintains present direction preference until doors closed and locked. If No, car maintains direction preference only until door dwell time expires.

- Double Ding Down (Yes/No)

Causes lanterns and gongs to double-strike if car direction preference is down.

- DCB Cancels CCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing the Door Close Button cancels the active car call door timer and begins closing doors immediately.

- DCB Cancels HCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing the Door Close button cancels the active hall call door timer and begins closing doors immediately.

- DCB Cancels LOT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing the Door Close button cancels the lobby dwell timer and begins closing the doors immediately.

- PHE Cancels CCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, photo eye activation cancels the active car call dwell timer.

- PHE Cancels HCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, photo eye activation cancels the active hall call dwell timer.

2-6 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 01

Subtab Description

Elevator Features - PHE Cancels LOT (Yes/No)

If Yes, photo eye activation resets the lobby door dwell timer.

- CCB Cancels CCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing a car call button while the doors are open will cancel normal car call door dwell time and cause the doors to begin closing.

- CCB Cancels HCT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing a car call button cancels the active hall call dwell timer and begin closing doors immediately.

- CCB Cancels LOT (Yes/No)

If Yes, pressing a car call button will cancel the lobby door dwell timer and begin closing doors immediately.

- Stuck Insp Input (TSSA) (Yes/No): If Yes, and if any inspection direction or enable inputs remain high for more than one second during passenger operation, or during inspection operation, if any combination of inspection inputs remain high for more than five seconds, except for Enable plus Up (e.g., ICEN + ICPU) and Enable plus Down (e.g., ICEN + ICPD), a stuck inspection button fault will be generated.

- Idle Door Open (Yes/No): If Yes, the car will open its doors when Idle or Parked at a floor.

- Latch Door Open (Yes/No): If Yes, keeps the Door Open

Function (DOF) on when doors are open.

- Latch Door Close (Yes/No): If Yes, keeps the Door Close

Function (DCF) on when doors are closed.

- Door Contact Fault Latch (Yes/No): Latches a door contact fault for door contact failures/mismatches.

- Earthquake Normal Mode:

None: Car is not allowed to run on earthquake operation.

After Delay: Car is allowed to run at reduced speed 10 seconds after reaching a floor, only if the counterweight is not derailed.

Fire Only: Car is allowed to run at reduced speed 10 seconds after reaching a floor, only if the counterweight is not derailed and only on fire service.

Configure Spare Inputs Allows input signals to be assigned to available spare inputs. Maximum 30. See

Spare Inputs on page 2-21

.

Configure Spare Outputs Allows output signals to be assigned to available spare outputs. Maximum 20. See

Spare Outputs on page 2-22

.

Input/Output Assignment

1. Select CONFIG01, Configure Spare Inputs (or Outputs).

2. Touch the unused input you want to configure. An assignment screen will appear.

3. Touch and highlight either the input/output you want to assign or the physical connection you want to assign to.

4. Change selection by scrolling up or down (scroll bar on the right).

5. When desired Inputs/Outputs and desired physical connections are aligned, press OK to return to the configure screen. Press Save to save changes.

2-7

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 01

Subtab

System Timers

Description

- Motor/Valve Time Limit (Default 3 minutes)

Starts when the controller attempts to move the car in the up direction and resets when the car reaches the destination floor. If the timer expires before the car reaches its destination, the controller stops trying to move the car up to protect the motor. The car will then lower to the bottom floor and shut down.

- Open Limit Time (Default 10 seconds)

Determines how long the door operator should attempt to open the doors before declaring an unsuccessful attempt (Door Open Fail 1 - 3). After 3 unsuccessful attempts, a Door Open Fault will be declared.

This action protects the door motor.

- Close Limit Time (Default 10 seconds)

Determines how long the door operator should attempt to close the doors before declaring an unsuccessful attempt (Door Close Fail 1 - 3). After 3 unsuccessful attempts, a Door Close Fault will be generated, followed by a Door Fault Shutdown. This action protects the door motor.

- Door Interlock Timer (Default 100 mS)

Introduces a delay when closing or opening doors are abruptly reversed. This may be required if the door operator is sensitive to such reversal due to debounce capability. Set to 0.0 if not required.

- Short Door Timer (Default 1 second)

Length of time doors will remain open after being reopened by photo eye, safety edge, or door open button.

- Car Call Timer (Default 2 seconds)

Length of time doors will remain open to service a car call.

- Hall Call Timer (Default 4 seconds)

Length of time doors will remain open to service a hall call.

- Lobby Call Timer (Default 6 seconds)

Length of time doors will remain open to service a lobby call.

- ADA Car Timer (Default 3 seconds)

Length of time doors will remain open to service an

ADA car call.

- ADA Hall Timer (Default 5 seconds)

Length of time doors will remain open to service an

ADA hall call.

2-8 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 01

Subtab

System Timers

Description

- Stuck PHE Timer (Default 10 seconds)

Length of time the photo eye is allowed to delay closing before it is bypassed and the doors begin to close.

- Stuck SE Timer (Default 20 seconds)

Length of time the safety edge is allowed to delay closing before it is bypassed and the doors begin to close.

- Stuck DOB Timer (Default 10 seconds)

Length of time the door open button is allowed to delay closing before it is bypassed and the doors begin to close.

- Car Delayed Timer (Default 30 seconds)

Removes the car from hall call demand if delayed beyond the timer setting.

- COS Timer (Default 5 minutes)

If the car delayed condition persists for the amount of time set here, the car will be removed from service for all calls.

- FLO Timer (Default 5 minutes)

When a car is inactive for this amount of time, the fan and light will automatically be turned off.

- Door Hold Timer (Default 20 seconds)

Time to hold the doors open for a momentary activation of the Door Hold input (button).

- Parking Timer (Default 2 seconds)

If a car is idle in excess of the time set here, it will move to its designated parking floor.

- Sleep Mode Timer (Default 10 minutes)

The touch screen will enter sleep mode when this timer expires if there has been no interactivity.

2-9

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

Subtab

Hoistway Setup

NTS2 Switches

Description

Floor heights are set during hoistway learn operation but may be adjusted here to compensate for floor level magnet position imperfections.

- Floor Height (n): Level at floor height in inches for each landing.

- Floor Offset (n): “Moves” the floor up or down (negative entries) to adjust the elevator level position.

- Counterweight Position: Distance in inches from the bottom of the hoistway at which the counterweight and car are directly adjacent. Traction only.

- Landing System ID: Automatically entered during learn operation. Forces a new learn if the landing system software or hardware is changed.

- Top Access Distance: Sets the location of the “top access switch” that limits downward travel to a point at which the crosshead is level with the sill when accessing the car top.

- Bottom Access Distance: Sets the location of the “bottom access switch” that limits upward travel to a point at which the bottom of the apron is even with the hoistway entrance header.

- U/DTL Limit Option: Select whether UTL and DTL switches are physical or virtual (in software).

- U/DTL Distance: If these switches are virtual, this sets the distance beyond terminal floor level at which the switch is positioned.

- U/DSL2 Option: Select whether these switches are physical or virtual (in software).

- USL2 Speed: Learned/programmed speed at or below which the car must be travelling when this switch is encountered to use normal slowdown means.

- USL2 Delta-L Speed: Provides an adder to USL2 Speed.

If the car is travelling at or below the sum of Delta-L and USL2 speed, an emergency slowdown is used to bring the car into the terminal.

- USL2 Delta-H Speed: Provides an adder to USL2 Speed.

If the car is travelling at or above the sum of Delta-H and USL2 speed, the car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

- USL2 Distance: Learned/programmed distance at which the virtual USL2 switch is positioned from terminal floor level.

- USL2 Delta Distance: Sets a distance on both sides of the switch within which the switch must be detected to avoid an emergency stop.

- DSL2 Speed: Learned/programmed speed at or below which the car must be travelling when this switch is encountered to use normal slowdown means.

- DSL2 Delta-L Speed: Provides an adder to DSL2 Speed.

If the car is travelling at or below the sum of Delta-L and DSL2 speed, an emergency slowdown is used to bring the car into the terminal.

2-10 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

Subtab

NTS2 Switches

ETS Switches

Description

- DSL2 Delta-H Speed: Provides an adder to DSL2 Speed.

If the car is travelling at or above the sum of Delta-H and DSL2 speed, the car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

- DSL2 Distance: Learned/programmed distance at which the virtual DSL2 switch is positioned from terminal floor level.

- DSL2 Delta Distance: Sets a distance on both sides of the switch within which the switch must be detected to avoid an emergency stop.

- U/DETS-LS Option: Select whether these switches are used on this job.

- U/DETS-LS Overspeed: This is the speed, in feet per minute, which the car must be below when opening the

Emergency Terminal LS Switch.

- U/DETS Option: Select whether these switches are physical or virtual (in software).

- UETS Speed: This is the speed, in feet per minute, which the car must be below when opening the Up

Emergency Terminal Switch. This value, plus the value of the UETS Delta Speed settings, must not exceed

95% of Contract Speed.

- UETS Delta Speed: Delta Speed provides an “adder” to

UETS speed. UETS speedand Delta speed together may not exceed 95% of contract speed. Initially, calculate the Delta as 95% of Contract Speed - Learned Speed @ switch = Delta value.

- UETS Distance: Distance in inches from the top terminal floor level position at which the UETS switch is positioned. Learned value.

- UETS Delta Distance: Distance in inches on either side of the UETS position inside which the car must detect the switch. If the switch is not detected within this span, the car will perform an emergency stop. Generally set to 6.0 inches.

- DETS Speed: This is the speed, in feet per minute, which the car must be below when opening the Down

Emergency Terminal Switch. This value, plus the value of the DETS Delta Speed settings, must not exceed 95% of Contract Speed.

- DETS Delta Speed: Delta Speed provides an “adder” to

DETS speed. DETS speed and Delta speed together may not exceed 95% of contract speed. Initially, calculate the

Delta as 95% of Contract Speed - Learned Speed @ switch = Delta value.

- DETS Distance: Distance in inches from the bottom terminal floor level position at which the DETS switch is positioned. Learned value.

- DETS Delta Distance: Distance in inches on either side of the DETS position inside which the car must detect the switch. If the switch is not detected within this span, the car will perform an emergency stop. Generally set to

6.0 inches.

2-11

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab Subtab

S-Curve

Roll Jerk

Standard

Alternate

Acceleration

Manual

Start Jerk

Leveling Speed

Zero Speed

CONFIG 02

S-Curve

Description

Roll Jerk

Deceleration

Danger

Correction Speed

Stop Jerk

Proximity Distance

- Standard Start Jerk: Defines the transition from zero speed to full acceleration. As this value increases, the profile transitions more quickly from starting to maximum acceleration. Values typically range from 4.0 to

8.0.

- Standard Roll Jerk: Determines how quickly the profile transitions from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration. As Roll Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort but are harder to fit into the shortest one-floor-runs. We recommend you identify the shortest full height floor and use it when testing parameter values. Typical values range upwards from a minimum of

4.0.

- Standard Stop Jerk: Defines the transition from deceleration to Leveling Speed. As stop jerk increases the profile transitions more quickly from deceleration to leveling speed.

- Standard Acceleration: Determines the maximum acceleration for the profile and the maximum current delivered by the drive during acceleration. Maximum value is typically 4.0; minimum is usually not less than 2.5.

Higher values than 4.0 are possible but do not yield significant improvements in performance.

2-12 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

S-Curve

Subtab Description

- Standard Deceleration: Determines the maximum deceleration for this profile. The maximum value is typically 4.0 and the minimum is usually not less than 2.0 with common values raging from 2.75 to 3.75. The value of deceleration is usually slightly less than the value of acceleration.

- Alternate Start Jerk: Defines the transition from zero speed to full acceleration. As this value increases, the profile transitions more quickly from starting to maximum acceleration. Values typically range from 4.0 to

8.0.

- Alternate Roll Jerk: Determines how quickly the profile transitions from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration. As Roll Jerk increases, the profile transitions more quickly. Lower values provide greater comfort but are harder to fit into the shortest one-floor-runs. We recommend you identify the shortest full height floor and use it when testing parameter values. Typical values range upwards from a minimum of

4.0.

- Alternate Stop Jerk: Defines the transition from deceleration to Leveling Speed. As stop jerk increases the profile transitions more quickly from deceleration to leveling speed.

- Alternate Acceleration: Determines the maximum acceleration for the profile and the maximum current delivered by the drive during acceleration. Maximum value is typically 4.0; minimum is usually not less than 2.5.

Higher values than 4.0 are possible but do not yield significant improvements in performance.

- Alternate Deceleration: Determines the maximum deceleration for this profile. The maximum value is typically 4.0 and the minimum is usually not less than 2.0 with common values raging from 2.75 to 3.75. The value of deceleration is usually slightly less than the value of acceleration.

- Danger Start Jerk: Danger profile is used for emergency slowdown. If, after stopping, the car restarts while remaining on the danger profile, this defines the transition from zero speed to full acceleration.

- Danger Roll Jerk: Determines how quickly the profile transitions from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration.

- Danger Stop Jerk: Defines the transition from deceleration to stop.

2-13

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

S-Curve

Subtab

NTS1 Switches

Description

- Danger Deceleration: Determines the maximum deceleration for this profile.

- Manual Start Jerk: Defines the transition from zero speed to full acceleration on manual movement, including inspection operation.

- Manual Roll Jerk: Determines how quickly the profile transitions from maximum to zero acceleration and zero to maximum deceleration.

- Manual Stop Jerk: Defines the transition from deceleration to Stop.

- Manual Acceleration: Determines maximum acceleration for the profile.

- Manual Deceleration: Determines the maximum deceleration for the profile.

- U/DSL1 Option: Select whether a physical or virtual

(software) switch is used.

- USL1 Speed: Speed at which the car should be traveling when encountering this switch during a normal run to the terminal in order for normal stopping means to properly slow and stop the car.

- USL1 Delta-L Speed: Provides an “adder” to the USL1

Speed setting. If the car is traveling at or below the sum of USL1 and Delta-L Speed, normal slowing and stopping means are used.

- USL1 Delta-H Speed: Provides an “adder” to the USL1

Speed setting. If the car is traveling at or above the sum of USL1 and Delta-H Speed, an emergency slowdown is initiated.

- USL1 Distance: The distance from the top terminal floor level position at which this switch is located.

- USL1 Delta Distance: Distance in inches on either side of the USL1 switch inside which the car must detect the switch. If the switch is not detected within this span, the car will drop high speed. Generally 6.0 inches.

- DSL1 Speed: Speed at which the car should be traveling when encountering this switch during a normal run to the terminal in order for normal stopping means to properly slow and stop the car.

- DSL1 Delta-L Speed: Provides an “adder” to the DSL1

Speed setting. If the car is traveling at or below the sum of DSL1 and Delta-L Speed, normal slowing and stopping means are used.

- DSL1 Delta-H Speed: Provides an “adder” to the DSL1

Speed setting. If the car is traveling at or above the sum of DSL1 and Delta-H Speed, an emergency slowdown is initiated.

- DSL1 Distance: The distance from the bottom terminal floor level position at which this switch is located.

- DSL1 Delta Distance: Distance in inches on either side of the DSL1 switch inside which the car must detect the switch. If the switch is not detected within this span, the car will drop high speed. Generally 6.0 inches.

2-14 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

Subtab

System Control

Parameters

Description

(Also see S-Curve on page 2-12 )

- Primary Dispatcher: If this is the primary dispatcher of a duplex pair or a standalone Simplex, set to Yes. If this is the local (non dispatcher) of a Duplex set, set to No.f

- Profile Advance: Advances application of the curve but with no speed command issued.

- Profile Scale: Scales the curve to affect all associated speed settings, i.e., 50% of standard pattern would reduce contract and other associated speeds to 50% of their value.

- Hoistmotor Speed: Setting in drive sheave RPM at which the car achieves contract speed.

- Contract Overspeed: Feet per minute above contract speed at which a contract overspeed is detected.

- Inspect Overspeed: Feet per minute above inspection speed at which an overspeed is detected and an emergency stop initiated.

- Level Overspeed: Feet per minute above leveling speed at which a leveling overspeed is detected and an emergency stop initiated.

- Contract Speed: Car rated speed in feet per minute.

- High Speed: Maximum car speed in feet per minute.

Normally the same as Contract Speed. Traction only.

- Backup (Alternate) Speed: Feet per minute at which the car should run on emergency generator power.

- Earthquake Speed: Feet per minute at which the car should operate if code allows movement during earthquake operation.

- Correct Speed: Feet per minute at which the car will run when moving to a floor or terminal to correct position.

- Inspection Speed (Fast): Feet per minute at which the car should run on Inspection operation.

- Inspection Speed (Slow): Reduced inspection speed upon encountering an NTS1 switch.

- Level Speed: Speed the car should transition to when leveling into a landing.

- Level Distance: Distance from the landing at which the car should transition to leveling speed.

- Relevel Distance: Distance from the landing within which the car should relevel.

- Dead Zone Distance: Distance from floor level position at which the stop command is issued during initial leveling and the car “coasts” to a stop.

- Proximity Distance: Distance at which speed is transitioned to leveling speed under abnormal conditions like an emergency slowdown.

2-15

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 02

Subtab

System Control

Parameters

Description

- Following Error: Sets the allowed margin of deviation from commanded speed before a fault is declared as a percentage of that speed.

- Auto Norm Slew Rate: Smooths speed transitions for modes other than inspection. Reduce for smoother transitions.

- Auto Emerg Slew Rate: Determines how aggressively the car can decelerate under abnormal conditions like an emergency slowdown. Reduce for smoother transitions.

- Inspect Slew Rate: (Ft/Sec2): Determines how aggressively the car can decelerate during Inspection mode.

- Auto Slew Filter (Hz): Smooths any harsh transitions in the commanded speed for modes other than Inspection.

Reducing this value causes a smoother transition.

- Inspect Slew Filter (Hz): Smooths any harsh transitions in the commanded speed for Inspection mode.

- Drive Type: Select drive type in use.

- Emergency Brake Type: Select emergency brake in use.

- Unintended Motion: Floor Zone or Door Zone. Floor

Zone = The car has drifted more than six inches from the landing with car and hall doors open. Door Zone =

The car has drifted more than three inches from the door zone with car and hall doors open.

- Brake Drop Delay: Delay in milliseconds that the brake should be delayed from dropping after the speed command is dropped. Goal is to avoid dropping the brake on a moving motor.

- Speed Pick Delay: Time in milliseconds after the brake is picked before the speed command is issued. Used to prevent beginning movement under a slow picking brake.

- Speed Drop Delay: Time in milliseconds during which the drive should continue to exert motor control after the direction command is removed (car has achieved the floor but brake has not yet dropped). Used for drives that do not independently provide a parameter to extend this period of control.

- Drive Disable Delay: Time in milliseconds after stopping at a floor which the drive should maintain electrical control of the motor. May be used to compensate for a slow dropping brake.

2-16 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

CONFIG 03

Subtab

Building Security

Emergency Power

Recall Switches

Description

- Security Enabled (Yes/No): Security on or off?

- CC Enable Active Off (Yes/No): Is car call enable signal active in off/low or on/high state?

- Enable DOB on Security (Yes/No): Door open button functional if car is stopped at a secured floor?

- Ind Overrides Security (Yes/No): Is security enforced on

Independent mode?

- Remote Calls Override Sec (Yes/No): Do remotely placed calls (through touch screen, iMonitor, etc.) override security settings?

- Park at Secured Floor (Yes/No): Shall the car be allowed to park at a secured floor?

- Emergency Power Type:

None: No emergency power available.

Dispatcher: Emergency recall and run determined by dispatcher.

Overlay: Emergency recall and run determined through discrete I/O by emergency power overlay system.

- Cars to Run on EP: Number of cars able to run on emergency power.

- Pref Car to Run on EP2: Preferred car to run on emergency power after recall.

- Bypass EP Sequencing: When set to Yes, emergency power recall and select to run phases are bypassed and the maximum number of cars are selected to run on generator power without the need of an EP selection switch.

- EP Recall Floor: Floor to which cars will recall on emergency power.

- EP Recall Timeout: Number of seconds the dispatcher should attempt to recall a nonresponsive car before passing it by.

- EP Door Operation:

Open Doors: Doors open at recall floor. Default.

Cycle Doors: Door will cycle open and then close at recall floor.

Element provides four car recall inputs, Recall S1 - S4.

- Latch Switch (Seconds): At the recall floor, the car will wait for this period of time for an initiating action to be taken (i.e., independent control initiated, access operation initiated, etc.) before automatically returning to normal passenger service.

- Recall Floor: Set to desired recall floor.

- Override Security (Yes/No): If Yes, the recall operation will override security settings for the floor.

- Car Calls Disposition: How should registered car calls be handled before the car recalls? (Cancel Calls/Answer

Calls/Allow New Calls/Cancel Calls at Next Stop)

- Door Operation (Cycle Doors/Doors Closed/Doors

Open): Determines door action upon arrival at the recall floor.

- Override Independent (Yes/No): If Yes, recall operation will override Independent service.

2-17

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab Subtab

Network Settings

Description

- IP Address: IP address of car on LAN.

- Subnet Mask: Subnet mask of car on LAN.

- Default Gateway: Default gateway of car on LAN.

CONFIG 03

UTILS

File Transfer Menu Allows parameters to be restored:

- Backup Current Settings

- Restore Backup Settings

- Restore Factory Settings

When an option is selected, you are prompted to press

OK to continue or EXIT to abort without changing defaults.

Allows parameters to be transferred:

- Export Current Settings to USB Drive

- Import & Apply Settings from USB Drive

- Export Events to USB Drive

On-board Car and Hall call registration controls.

Register Calls

Construct and Bypass

Faults

- Construction/Fault Bypass

When active, enables Construction operation, bypasses faults. Also requires that the Fault Bypass jumper on the

SCE-CPU board be set to BYPASS and the car be placed on Inspection mode.

- Inspection Fault Bypass

When active, bypasses faults on Inspection operation.

Also requires that the Fault Bypass jumper on the SCE-

CPU board be set to BYPASS.

- Automatic Fault Bypass

Bypasses faults on Passenger operation. Also requires that the Fault Bypass jumper on the SCE-CPU board be set to BYPASS. A countdown timer will appear on the

Home screen, counting down from 2 hours. When the timer expires, the car will automatically exit fault bypass operation. If more time is required, must be re-enabled.

Safety Tests

Date and Time

Commissioning test assistance, Automated Tests on page 1-56 .

Date and time setting controls.

Landing System Utilities Landing System Learn - Allows you to learn the hoistway,

page 1-46

.

Landing System View - Displays position and speed information at upper and lower leveling markers during floor leveling. Displays on/off status for SDU (Step Down Up),

ULM (Up Level Marker), DZ (Door Zone), DLM (Down

Level Marker), SDD (Step Down Down).

Terminal Switch Learn: Hoistway switch position, speed,

and delta learn operation, page 1-51

2-18 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

SYSTEM IO

SYSTEM

DIAG

SPA

DIAG

SPB

DIAG

Subtab

System Inputs

System Outputs

Programmed Inputs

Programmed Outputs

Main CPI IO’s

Aux CPI IO’s

Motion IO

Event Log

Door Control

Diagnostics Tree

Landing System

Active Events

SPA Flags

SPA Numeric

SPA Motion Numeric

Emergency Pwr & EQ

Door Dwell Times

Itinerary Manager

SPB Flags

SPB Numeric

SPB Inputs

SPB Outputs

Description

On/Off status of dedicated inputs.

On/Off status of dedicated outputs.

On/Off status of programmable inputs.

On/Off status of programmable outputs.

On/Off status of CPI inputs/outputs

On/Off status of CPI inputs/outputs

Groups indicators for the inputs and outputs active during car motion.

First In, First Out record of the last 200 events, time and date stamped. Colors: Blue = informational; Yellow = fault; Red = Error; Gray = No longer active.

On/Off status of door control inputs/outputs.

Indicators for selected PLD functions. See page 2-32

On/Off status of landing system inputs/outputs.

Displays currently active system faults.

Indicators for car operation activity.

Data register information for factory assisted diagnosis.

Data register information for factory assisted diagnosis.

Indicators related to emergency power and earthquake operation.

Indicators for active dwell timers.

Indicators for active car operation signals.

Indicators for motion activity.

Data register information for factory assisted diagnosis.

Indicators for motion related inputs

Indicators for motion related outputs.

SPC

DIAG

PLD

DIAG

SPC Flags

SPC Numeric

SPC Inputs

SPC Outputs

Group to Car Data

Car to Group Data

PLD Flags

PLD Numeric

PLD Inputs

PLD Outputs

Indicators for USB, Ethernet, and SD card activity.

Data register information for factory assisted diagnosis.

Indicators for communications related inputs.

Indicators for communications related outputs.

Group to car data monitoring

Car to group data monitoring

Indicators for PLD related I/O.

Data register info for PLD.

Indicators for PLD related inputs.

Indicators for PLD related outputs.

2-19

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.1 Touchscreen Organization and Content

Tab

ACTION

INFO

Subtab Description

Car Call Canceled Due To Conditions affecting car call cancellation and their status.

Hall Call Canceled Due To Conditions affecting hall call cancellation and their status.

Door Open Due To Conditions affecting door opening and their status.

Door Close Due To Conditions affecting door closing and their status.

Prohibit Run/Start Due To Conditions affecting car running and their status.

STATUS

INFO

CPU Bus Com Status

Hall Bus Inventory

CAN Bus Viewer

Version Information

Other Car Settings

(display only)

Address Diagnostics

Maintenance Statistics

Hourly Statistics

Conditions affecting processor communication and their status.

With all hall calls installed and working, press INVTRY to inventory switches and indicators. After Inventory is run, press TEST to test for switch or indicator problems.

Allows viewing CAN bus data for SCE-CPU board. Each string provides the ID of the device and eight packets of

Hex data bytes. This tool is intended to be used in conjunction with MCE technical support.

Software version information.

- Emergency Power Type 2: As selected.

- Car 2 Floor ‘nn’ Opening: Front/Rear/None per floor served by non-dispatching car of Duplex.

- Car 2 Floor Heights: Height in inches per floor served by non-dispatching car of Duplex. Used by the Dispatching car to calculate ETA when making decisions.

- Allows you to request selected processor register data via address entry. Technician assisted troubleshooting.

Power cycles, Resets, Starts, etc.

Last 24 hours, per hour statistics for car calls, hall calls, up runs, down runs.

STATS

SCOPE

View Scope

Select From Landing System Signals

Select From System

Inputs

Select From Programmed

Inputs

Select From System Outputs

Select From Programmed

Outputs

Near real time scope with four trace capacity.

Select trace signals from landing system.

Select trace signals from among dedicated inputs.

Select trace signals from among programmable inputs.

Select trace signals from among dedicated outputs.

Select trace signals from among programmable outputs.

2-20 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

CC ENBL1-16

DCB

DCL

DLM

DOB

DOL

DOOR HOLD

DPM

EMDISP

EMDISP OV

EMSC SW

EMSH SW

EPI

EPI C

EP AUTO

EP MANUAL

EQ CWT

EQ SS

FR1 OFF

FR1 ON

FR1 ON2

FR1 RESET

FR2 CANCEL

FR2 HOLD

FR2 OFF

FR2 ON

FRSA OTHER

FRSM OTHER

HC CANCEL

IND SERV

LOAD DISP

LOAD HEAVY

LOAD LIGHT

LOAD OVER

LOAD OVER2

PFG ENABL

Table 2.2 Spare Inputs

Input

NOT USED

ALIVE

APS FAIL

APS ON

APS REVD

BRAKE SW

Description

This input is not currently assigned.

Input used in Duplex operation to inform the car that the other car is powered

Auxiliary power supply failure (TAPS or HAPS)

Auxiliary power supply (HAPS and TAPS)

Auxiliary power supply reverse direction (TAPS)

Brake switch. Must be assigned to an input terminal before physical brake verification is performed.

Car Call Enable Inputs from security system

Door close button

Door close limit

Down level marker

Door open button

Door open limit

Door hold button or switch

Door position monitor

Emergency dispatch

Emergency dispatch override

Emergency Medical Service in-car fixture input

Emergency Medical Service hall fixture input

Emergency power input (EPI)

Emergency power input, active low

Emergency power auto select input

Emergency power manual select input

Earthquake counterweight derail

Earthquake seismic sensor

OFF position of the primary fire recall switch

ON position of the primary fire recall switch

ON position of the additional fire recall switch

RESET position of the primary fire recall switch

Firefighter's CALL CANCEL switch

HOLD position of the firefighter's in car switch

OFF position of the firefighter's in car switch

ON position of the firefighter's in car switch

Other cars ALT recall input (from MR or Hoistway)

Other cars MAIN recall input (from MR or Hoistway)

Hall Call cancel

Independent service

Dispatch load

Heavy load

Light load

Overload

Overload 2 (for over 125% full load only)

Passing floor gong enable button

2-21

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.2 Spare Inputs

Input

PHE

PHE C

PHE CUT

PIT FLOOD

PTI

PTI C

R2

RECALL S1

RECALL S2

RECALL S3

RECALL S4

SAFE EDGE

SAF EDGE C

SECRTY OV

SMI

STD

STU

ULM

Description

Photo eye

Photo eye, active low

Photo eye cutout

Flood level switch

Power transfer input

Power transfer input, active low

Floor encoding input.

Recall Switch 1

Recall Switch 2

Recall Switch 3

Recall Switch 4

Door safe edge

Door safe edge, active low.

Security override.

Suspension Means Integrity. Traction only.

Step Down

Step Up

Up level marker

Table 2.3 Spare Outputs

Output

NOT USED

APS DONE

ARROW DN

ARROW UP

CAR DELAY

CC REGSTRD

CC SECURED

CAR GONG

CAR LANTDN

CAR LANTUP

DCF

DHOLD END

DHOLD ON

DOF

EF GONG

EMSC BUZZR

EMSC LIGHT

EMSH LIGHT

EP CARDONE

EP LIGHT

Description

This input is not currently assigned.

Auxiliary power supply recall complete

Down direction preference arrow

Up direction preference arrow

Car delayed

Car call register. Activates for 1/2 second when a car call is registered.

One second car call secured output active

Car gongs

Down car lanterns

Up car lanterns

Door close function

Door hold function ending warning buzzer

Door hold function active

Door open function

Egress floor arrival gong

Emergency Medical Service car buzzer output

Emergency Medical Service car light output

Emergency Medical Service hall light output

Emergency power recall done output

Emergency power light. Flashes when car is selected to run on emergency power. Solid when car is selected to recall.

2-22 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

EP ON

EP2 ON

EP SELECT

EP1 ON

EP1 RECALL

EP2 ON

EP2 RUN

EQ BUZZER

EQ LIGHT

FAN LIGHT

FLR GONG

FR HAT

FR ISV

FR RECALL

FR1 BUZR

FR1 DONE

FR1 LIGHT

FR2 STATUS

FSO

NUDG

NUDG BUZER

SERV IN

SERV OUT

Table 2.3 Spare Outputs

Output

EP LOBBY

Description

Intended to drive a a light at the designated main fire floor after the car is at the floor with doors open on emergency power.

Emergency power ON output

Emergency Power stage 2 (run) active

Emergency power car selected to recall or run output

Emergency power lowering phase output

Emergency power car selected to recall output

Emergency power running phase output

Emergency power car selected to run output

Earthquake buzzer

Earthquake light

Fan/light output

Passing floor gong

Fire I hat light

In service for fire service light

Fire recall light

Fire I buzzer

Fire recall complete

Fire phase one in effect light

In car fire service status

Fire service light

Nudging (reduce door closing speed and torque output)

Nudging buzzer

Car in service for hall calls

Car not in service for hall calls

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym

NOT USED

2 BUS

2 STOP FLG

2LS BUS

2MV BUS

SC-3HN

ABD

ABU

ADA

Description and Memory Location

An available spare input, or output, that has yet to be assigned @ CONFIG 01

Primary 110 VAC bus @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs 2BUS.B, or SPB Flags 2 BUS

Car is configured for 2 stop operation. When a car is set to be a two stop installation, CON-

FIG 01 / Building Setup parameters must be properly set and DLMS (Door Lock Middle

String) connection on SCE-HVI board must not be connected. @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Flags 2

STOP FLG

110 VAC bus, locks, safeties @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs M2L

110 VAC bus supply monitoring source @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs M2MV.B

The serial node board used in hall call boxes

Access Bottom Down @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs ABD.B, ABD.P, also PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

ABD

Access Bottom Up @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs ABU

American with Disabilities Act. Denotes special signals, timers, devices, etc. to accommodate disabled access.

2-23

Configuration and Troubleshooting

BRAKE SW

CDBO

CDBOB

CGED

CGEU

CMC

COC

COM

CONFIG

COP

COS

CP

CP DOWN

CP ENABLE

CPU

CP UP

CSC

BRE.B

BREDC

BRE.P

BRFLT

BRPK

BROM

BRP

BYP

CAR LANTDN

CAR LANTUP

CC

CCB

CCC

CCF

CCT

CDB

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym

APS

ATD

ATU

Description and Memory Location

Auxiliary Power Supply

Access Top Down @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs ATD

Access Top Up. Key switch access @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs ATU

Brake Switch. Must be assigned to an input terminal before brake position verification is performed. With the input assigned, Brake Pick Sw Open/Closed/Flaky faults are enabled.

BRE signal from Safety Processor B @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Outputs BRE.B and BRE.P

BRE signal from Safety Processor B @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Flags BRAKE DC

BRE signal from PLD @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Outputs BREP

Brake Fault input to controller @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Flags BRAKE FAULT

Brake picked indication @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Flags BRAKE PICK

Brake contactor output monitor @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs BROM.A

Brake Potential @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs BRP

Bypass @ PLD DIAG/PLD INPUTS FLT BYP JPR and under SYST I/O as FLT BYP

Car Lantern Down

Car Lantern Up

Car Call @ SPA DIAG/SPA FLAGS

Car Call Button

Cancel Car Calls.

Car Call Front

Car Call Dwell Time. Defined time for doors to remain open @ SPA DIAG/Door Dwell Times

Car Door Bypass @ SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs and also PLD DIAG/PLD Inputs

Car Door Bypass Output @ SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs and also PLD DIAG/PLD Inputs

Car Door Bypass Output B @ SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs and also PLD DIAG/PLD Inputs

Car Gong Enable Down

Car Gong Enable Up

Car Motion Control

Car Operation Control

On Home Screen, Communications bus. On prints, Common.

Configuration (input to PLD from SCE-CPU)

Car Operating Panel

Car Out of Service time @ ACTION INFO and CONFIG #1/ System Timers

Car Panel

Car Panel Inspection Down

Car Panel Inspection Enable

Central Processing Unit

Car Panel Inspection Up

Car Safety Control

CTEN

CTPR

CTST

CWI

CYCTST

DCB

Cartop Enable (button/signal) @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Flags, Flag label CTEN.P

Cartop power control output

Capture for Test input from Test/Pretest switch

Counterweight Input (derailed)

Cycle Test @ SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs and SPB Outputs

Door Close Button @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

2-24 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym Description and Memory Location

DCF

DCF

DCL

DETS

DFLT

DLAB

DLABB

DLAT

DLATB

DLK

DLM

DLMS

DLMSB

DLN (1/2)

DOB

DOF

Down Call Front @ SPA DIAG/ SPA Flags, various, DCF AT PRESS, DCF BELW PRESS, etc.

Door Close Function @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Door Control

Door Close Limit @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Door Control

Down Emergency Terminal Switch @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Landing System

Drive Fault input to controller @ System IO/ System Inputs

Door Lock Access Bottom @ System IO/ System Inputs

Door Lock Access Bottom to PLD

Door Lock Access Top @ System IO/ System Inputs

Door Lock Access Top to PLD

Door Lock @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Flags, see HDLK (Hall), GDLK(GATE) and on OBD - LOCKS

Down Level Marker @ System IO/ System Inputs

Door Lock Middle String @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Door Lock Middle String to PLD

Door Line voltage

Door Open Button @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

Door Open Function (signal) @ System IO/ System Outputs

DOL

DPM

DRDY

DRE

DREB

DRO

DSL

DTL

DZ

EB

EB1B

EB2A

EB2BP

EB4A

EMDISP

EMS

EQ

Door Open Limit @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

Door Position Monitor @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

Drive Ready (input to controller) @ System IO/ System Inputs

Drive Enable (output from controller) @ System IO/ System Outputs

Drive Ready Enable (from processor B)

Drive On (input to controller) @ System IO/ System Inputs

Down Slow Limit @ System IO/ System Inputs, see flags DSL1/DSL2

Down Terminal Limit @ System IO/ System Inputs

Door Zone @ SPA DIAG/ SPA Flags and SYSTEM DIAG/ Landing System and SPB DIAG/

Flags

Emergency Brake @ SPB DIAG/SPB Flags

EB1 solid state device enable from SPB

EB2 solid state device enable from SPA

EB2 solid state device enable from PLD

EB4 solid state device enable from SPA

Emergency Dispatch

Emergency Medical Service

Earthquake @ SPC DIAG/ SPC Inputs

EQ CWT

EQI

EQR

ESC

ESCTO.B

ETH

FB

FIRE II CC

Earthquake Counterweight

Earthquake Input

Earthquake Reset @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs, see EQR.B

Emergency Stop Car @ System IO/ System Inputs

Emergency Switch Cutout enable, Safety Processor B @ SPB DIAG/SPB Outputs

Ethernet

Fault Bypass @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs, see FBYP.P Flag

(In-car) Fire Service Car Call Cancel @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

FIRE II HOLD In-Car Fire Switch Hold @ ACTION INFO/ Car Calls Cancelled Due To, also see FR2 HOLD

FR2 HOLD See FIRE II HOLD

2-25

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym Description and Memory Location

HDBOB

HIN1

HIN2

HOUT1

HOUT2

ICEN

ICPD

ICPU

ICTD

ICTU

FR2 OFF

FR2 ON

FLO

FLPC

FLPWR

FLR GONG

FLT

FLT BYP

FPM

FR

FR HAT

FR1 BUZZER

FR1 LIGHT

FR1 OFF

FR1 ON

FR1 RESET

IN1H

In-Car Fire Switch OFF @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs, also see FIRE II OFF

In-Car Fire Switch ON @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs, also see FIRE II ON

Fan Light Output @ SPA DIAG/ SPA Flags also in CONFIG 01/ System Timers

Fan Light Power Control

Car fan and light power control @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Outputs

Floor Gong

Fault

Fault Bypass

Feet Per Minute

Fault Reset @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs also called FLT RST BTN

Fire service light enable output @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire service buzzer enable output @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire service light, lobby, enable @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire recall switch off input @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire recall switch on input @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire Recall reset input @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

FRA

FRS

FRSA

FRSM

GOS (1/2)

GOV

GP

GP PLD

Fire Recall Alternate @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire Recall Main @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire Recall Switch, this car Alternate @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs and Outputs

Fire Recall Switch Main

Governor Overspeed switch In (1), Out (2).

Governor

General purpose

General Purpose output (PLD controlled).

GS/gate switch PLD gate switch monitor @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

GSB Secondary gate switch monitor to PLD

HAPS

HC

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply (MCE APS product for hydraulic elevators)

Hall Call

HCF

HCT

HDB

HDBO

Hall Call Front

Hall Call Time. Defined time for doors to remain open @ SPA DIAG/ Door Dwell Timers

Hoistway Door Bypass signal to Safety Processors B @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Hoistway Door Bypass Output @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Hoistway Door Bypass Output B @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

120VAC car lighting/fan power input

120VAC car lighting/fan power input

120VAC car lighting/fan power output

120VAC car lighting/fan power output

In Car Inspection Enable @ System IO/ System Inputs

In Car Inspection push button down @ System IO/ System Inputs

In Car Inspection push button up @ System IO/ System Inputs

Inspection Cartop down button @ System IO/ System Inputs

Inspection Cartop up button @ System IO/ System Inputs

Programmable 24VDC active high input. Seismic input. See Job prints @ SPC DIAG/ SPC inp.

2-26 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Screen Descriptions

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym Description and Memory Location

IN2H

INA

INAO

INCP

INCPO

INCT

INCTD

INCTO

INCTU

IND

IND SERV

IP

LLI

LOP

LOPM

LOT

MAIN CLOCK

MBRE

MDRE

MC-CPI-2

MEB1 2

MEB3 4

MLT

MPME

MPSBR

MRDN

MREN

MRIN

MRINO

MRUP

MSAF

NDF OUT

NUDG

Programmable 24VDC active high input. Seismic input. See Job prints @ SPC DIAG/ SPC inp.

Inspection, Access. Hoistway access enable switch input @ System IO/ System Inputs

Access enable input from Safety Processor A

Inspection Car Panel @ System IO/ System Inputs

Inspection Car Panel input from Safety Processor A

Inspection, Car Top @ System IO/ System Inputs

Inspection Cartop Down input

Inspection Cartop input from Safety Processor A

Inspection Cartop Up input

Independent service input

Independent Service

Internet Protocol

Light Load Input. Input from load weigher @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

Landing Operating Panel

Loss Of Power input to Safety Processor B from SCE-UPD board

Lobby Open Time. Defined time for doors to remain @ SPA DIAG/ Door Dwell Times

Main Clock @ PLDDIAG/ PLD Inputs

Monitor for low side solid state driver for brake contactor @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Monitor for Drive Enable (output from controller)

The serial car panel interface board

Monitor for low side solid state driver for EB1/2 to PLD

Monitor for low side solid state driver for EB3/4 @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Motor Limit Timer @ ACTION INFO/ Prohibit Run/Start Due to

Monitor for PM contactor solid state driver @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Brake contactor output monitor @ SPA DIAG/ SPA Inputs

Machine Room DOWN (inspection direction button) @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Machine Room Enable (inspection enable button) @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Machine Room Inspection @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Machine Room Inspection input from Safety Processor B

Machine Room UP (inspection direction button) @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Inputs

Main Safety String input to Safety Processor B

Nudging Function (signal) @SPC DIAG/ SPC Flags

Nudging (door closing) @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Door control

NUDG BUZER Nudging Buzzer

PFG Passing Floor Gong @ System IO/ Programmable Outputs, see FLR GONG flag

PHE

PLD

PME

PMEB

Photo eye protection device for elevator car doors @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Door Control

Programmable Logic Device

Primary Motor Enable

Primary Motor Enable @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Outputs

PMEP

PMP

PSN

PTI

Primary Motor Enable, PLD @ PLD DIAG/PLD Inputs

Primary Motor Contactor Proving @ PLD DIAG/PLD Inputs

Position

Power Transfer Input. Use to shut down the elevator @ System IO/ Programmable Inputs

2-27

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.4 Acronym Descriptions and Memory Locations

Acronym Description and Memory Location

RGOK

SAFA

SAFB

SAFB.P

SAFC.P

SAFCT

SAFH.B

SAFP

SANE(x)

SCE-CON

SE

SHLD

SMI

SPA

SPB

SPC

Rope Gripper OK

Safety from processor A

Safety from processor B

Safety from safety processor B @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Safety String Car @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Car safety string input from Safety Processor B.

Safety String Hoistway @ SPB DIAG/ SPB Inputs

Safety PLD @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Outputs

Processing device verification @ PLD DIAG/ PLD Flags

Small interface board for LS-EDGE-EL landing system. Generally installed in COP.

Safe Edge protection device for elevator car doors @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Door Control

Shield (“wire”)

Suspension Means Integrity

Safety Processor A, car operation and control @ SPA DIAG

Safety Processor B, motion @ SPB DIAG

Safety Processor C, communications @ SPC DIAG

SPD(n)

SPI

STD

STU

TAPS

TEST

TRACTION

UCF

Landing System speed input @ SPB DIAG/SPB Numeric, see Profile Dist and Pos

Serial Peripheral Interface

Step Down

Step Up

Traction Auxiliary Power Supply (MCE APS product for traction elevators).

Test mode active output from Test/Pretest switch.

Traction/Hydro select (for PLD configuration) @ CONFIG 01/ Building Setup

Up Call Front @ SPA DIAG/ SPA Flags SPA DIAG/ SPA Flags

UETS

UIM

Up Emergency Terminal Switch @ SYSTEM DIAG/ Landing System

Unintended Motion

UIM RST/UIMR Unintended Motion Reset @ System IO/ System Inputs

ULM Up Level Marker @ System IO/ System Inputs

USB uSD

USLx

UTL

Universal Serial Bus

Micro SD RAM

Up Slow Limit @ System IO/ System Inputs see USL1 and USL2 flags

Up Terminal Limit @ System IO/ System Inputs

2-28 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Web Browser Access

Web Browser Access

Element hosts a web server that allows web browser access to the system to view the event log.

Web Setup

Building IT personnel can configure web settings for the Element controller through the onboard touch screen interface. If you are connecting locally, you can probably just connect Element to your local Ethernet and enter the Element IP address as described under “Access” below.

1. With Element powered and on machine room inspection operation, select the CONFIG

03 screen, Network Settings menu on the touch screen.

2. Set and save IP settings appropriate to the interface being used.

Access

1. Launch the web browsing application.

2. Enter the Element IP address into the browser URL window, and press Return.

3. Once the connection is established, an interface screen will appear.

USB Parameter Transfer

Once a controller is properly set up, you can copy parameters to a USB drive (thumb drive) and transfer them to a second controller to save set up time.

1. Insert the USB drive in the USB connector on the SCE-CPU board.

2. On the touch screen, navigate to the Utilities screen.

3. Select File Transfer.

4. Select Backup Current Settings to USB Drive. Follow on-screen instructions.

Uploading the parameters to the next controller:

1. Insert the USB drive in the USB connector on the SCE-CPU board.

2. On the touch screen, navigate to the Utilities screen.

3. Select File Transfer.

4. Select Restore Backup Settings from USB Drive. Follow on-screen instructions.

2-29

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Event Log Archive/eMail

The Element event log is stored on a micro SD card on the SCE-CPU board. When log capacity is reached, the oldest event will be deleted as a new event is recorded. See also

Event Log Viewing on page 2-91 .

USB Archive

You can copy the event log from the SD card to a USB drive.

1. Insert a USB drive on the SCE-CPU board.

2. Open the UTILS screen; select File Transfer.

3. Scroll to the lower screen; press Export Events to USB Drive.

4. Press OK to confirm or Exit to abort.

5. Place the USB drive in a USB port on your PC (or an attached adapter).

6. If you have Microsoft Excel or a similar program, open it and import the log file from the

USB drive. It will open in table format and may be saved as an Excel file.

7. If you do not have Excel or a similar program, you can open the log file in any word processing or “text” application and save it as simple text or as a .csv (comma separated values) file.

Ethernet Archive

If the Element control is connected to Ethernet:

1. Open your web browser.

2. Enter the Element IP address into the URL entry window and press Return.

3. When contact is established, select the Faults tab. After a few moments, current events will appear followed by the Event Log.

4. Depending upon applications available on your PC:

• Right click on the screen and select “Select All.”

• Right click on the highlighted text and select “Copy.”

• Open an application like Microsoft Word or Simple Text on your PC.

• Select Paste. (A landscape page layout is best if you are in a word processing application.)

• Save the file.

When you initially right-clicked on the screen, you may have seen other options such as

Save to PDF, or Export to Excel. Additional options like these will vary depending on what applications are installed on your PC. These additional options are also available to you as a way to capture and save event log files.

email

Once the log file is on your PC, you can easily attach it to an email and send it to any recipient for troubleshooting help or central archiving.

2-30 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Troubleshooting Reference

Danger

Always observe safety precautions when troubleshooting. Lethal voltages are present.

This section includes:

• Bus voltage testpoints and fuse locations

• Touch screen tools, page 2-32

• Circuit board descriptions, page 2-32

• Fault Message Descriptions,

page 2-52

Bus Voltage Testpoints and Fuse Locations

Required operating voltages are distributed through fused buses.

Table 2.5 Bus Voltages

1

Bus Description

Ground

2

24

110 VAC

24 VDC

Testpoints

Controller ground is critical. Poor ground introduces potential danger, electrical noise, and can prevent system inputs, outputs, and assemblies from working correctly. System must be grounded to a point certified by an Electrician. NEC 250.

110VAC, 2 Bus for high voltage connections throughout system

24VDC, +24, 24CTP, 24HWY buses.

Table 2.6 SC-UPD Board Fuses

Fuse Use

F2

F2MV

F24CTP

F24FS

2 Bus, 2A, 250V. Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312

2MV Bus, 3A, 250V. Bussman MDQ, Littelfuse 313

24CT Bus, 2A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312.

F24FS Bus, 2A, 250V. Bussman MDQ, Littelfuse 313

F24HWY 24H Bus, 1A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312. 24V supply to fire alarm initiating devices, switches, and indicators.

F24VDC

FDLN1

FDLN2

FFLO

FGOV

FXL1

24VDC Bus, 6A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312.

F7, 4A, 250V, Bussman MDQ Littelfuse 313. AC to door operator.

F8, 4A, 250V, Bussman MDQ Littelfuse 313. AC to door operator.

Car fan and light output. 6A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312

GOS1, 4A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312. 110VAC to governor overspeed switch.

10A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312. Supply for CPU, CTPR, LOPM, 24CT, and 24H buses.

FXL2 10A, 250V, Bussman AGC, Littelfuse 312. Supply for CPU, CTPR, LOPM, 24CT, and 24H buses.

Table 2.7 Backplane Fuses

Bus Description

FL1 - FL3 Line Voltage See fuse labeling in controller.

Type

2-31

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Tools

System IO

At this level, inputs and outputs are grouped separately and alphabetically with no deference to their function.

• Inputs and Outputs: Indicators reflect activation of that physical input or output. When the board LED is lighted, the indicator will also be lighted.

• System Inputs: Dedicated (non-programmable) inputs status indicators.

• System Outputs: Dedicated (non-programmable) outputs status indicators.

• Programmed Inputs: Programmable inputs status indicators.

• Programmed Outputs: Programmable outputs status indicators

1. If an input is not in the proper state, troubleshoot the connection and the source.

2. If an output is in the proper state but the system is not reacting accordingly, troubleshoot the connection and the destination equipment.

3. If an output is not in the proper state, check the job prints to see what inputs or internal flags must be asserted in order to enable the output.

• Troubleshoot associated inputs in System IO or System Diagnostics.

• Troubleshoot internal flags according to their origination (i.e., safety processors A, B, or C, or PLD).

System Diagnostics

At this level, inputs and outputs are gathered into sets according to the system they affect (their collective function). (See troubleshooting steps above.)

• Motion IO: Indicators for input and output activity during car motion.

• Door Control: Indicators for door related inputs and outputs.

• Landing System: Indicators for landing system related inputs and outputs.

• Event Log: Time stamped entries for system events and faults.

• Diagnostics Tree: Indicators on this screen must be ON in order for the related function to succeed. Some indicators are single; some (+) expand to a list when selected. If the system is not doing what it is supposed to, an unlighted indicator points you to the problem.

• Active Faults: Displays currently active faults.

SPA, SPB, SPC, PLD Diagnostics

For each system processor and for the PLD, these screens can provide information useful for indepth diagnostics. Flags are visible indicators of active signals, descriptively labeled so you can understand what they represent. Numerics are register data bit information and are intended for factory diagnostics. They are also useful when MCE Technical Support is assisting in diagnosing a system.

The job prints will indicate what flags/functions are required to enable an output. The output

(or an input) can be viewed through the System IO or System Diagnostics screen. Associated flags/functions can be viewed through the screen for the appropriate safety processor or PLD.

SPA Diag Car operating control related indicators.

SPB Diag Motion related indicators (contactors, brake, motor, etc.).

2-32 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

SPC Diag Communications related indicators.

PLD Diag System wide indicators.

Action Info

This display provides indicators that can help to discover why an unexpected action is occurring.

• Car Call Canceled Due To: Inputs or states that can cause car calls to be cancelled.

• Hall Call Canceled Due To: Inputs or states that can cause hall calls to be cancelled.

• Door Open Due To: Inputs or states that can cause doors to open or remain open.

• Prohibit Run/Start Due to: Inputs or states that can cause starting or running to be disabled.

• Door Close Due To: Inputs or states that can cause doors to close or remain closed.

Status Info

View:

• CPU, BUS, COM Status

• Hall Bus Inventory: When all hall calls are installed and functioning properly use the

INVTRY control on this screen to add them to system memory. When troubleshooting hall calls at a future date, use the TEST control to automatically poll and test all switches and lamps.

Stats

Collected statistics for maintenance and system activity.

• Software version information.

• Maintenance Statistics: Collected run-related statistics. Compiled until manually cleared.

• Hourly Statistics: Car and hall call statistics per hour for the preceding 24 hours.

Scope

The virtual oscilloscope allows you to select up to four signals from an elevator subsystem and display them in near real-time.

1. Select the subsystem:

• System Inputs

• System Outputs

• Landing System

• Programmed Inputs

• Programmed Outputs

2. Use the scroll arrows to move through signals.

3. For each desired signal, tap on one of the four boxes on the right of the screen. The signal will appear in the box.

4. Tap on OK to return to the selection screen, then on View Scope.

5. Touch the scope arrows to adjust trace speed (amount of time represented by screen graticules).

6. The selected signals will remain on the scope until you replace them with others.

2-33

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Circuit Board Descriptions

Element controller circuit boards:

• MC-CPI-2: COP serialization, landing system interface, added I/O

page 1-41, page 2-35

• SC-3HN: Serial Hall Call Node Board, page 1-38

• SCE-BRK: Brake board,

page 2-37

• SCE-CON: Cartop Connections Board, page 2-38

• SCE-CPU: Controller processor,

page 2-40

• SCE-HVI: High voltage interface,

page 2-47

• SCE-UPD: Unregulated power distribution,

page 2-50

2-34 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

MC-CPI-2

MC-CPI-2 boards provide serialization of control panel inputs and assignable I/O for interface to landing systems and/or door operators. CPI-2 boards are installed in the car control panel enclosure or, when used to expand System IO, in the controller enclosure as well.

Figure 2.5 MC-CPI-2 Board

CC24V: Use for CAR CALL indicators

24V: Use for buzzers, lamps, etc.

JP3 set to

24

24V power/

COM input

24V power/

COM to next board (if more than one used) CAN CAN

If one CPI-2 board, use termination jumper. If more than one, terminate the last board in the string also.

JP2

2-35

Configuration and Troubleshooting

CPI-2 Configuration The CPI-2 board(s) in your controller is/are factory-configured to match the job requirements.

• Jumpers:

• JP1: Factory

• JP2: Used to terminate the CAN communication bus. If you have just one CPI-2 board, this jumper should always be in the ON position. If you have more than one CPI-2 board, use this jumper on the last board in the string only.

• JP3: Sets the inactive level (OV or 24V) for the 24V INPUTS ONLY connections.

• 24V: OFF state is 24V. ON state is 0V. (USE FOR ELEMENT applications.)

• 0V: Off state is 0V. ON state is 24V.

Note

24V is the maximum input that may be applied. For outputs, 24V, 6W is the maximum load supported.

• DIP Switch SW1, Board address switches: Four-position DIP switch SW1 provides a unique address for each CPI board (you should never have two CPI boards with the same

SW1 setting).

DIP 1

Board SW1

0

1

2

3

Off

On

Off

On

CPI Boards

SW2

Off

Off

On

On

SW3

Off

Off

Off

Off

• SW1, switch 3, must remain OFF at all times.

• SW1, switch 4, determines CAN baud rate:

• ON: 500k - used if board is mounted INSIDE the Element controller cabinet

• OFF: 250k - default setting; use with board(s) mounted in COP

Installation and Connections

Please refer to “Serial Car Call Board” on page 1-41

.

SC-3HN Serial Hall Call Node Board

Please refer to “Hall Calls” on page 1-38 for a detailed description.

2-36 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

SCE-BRK Brake Control Board

This board provides pick and hold voltages for the machine brake.

Figure 2.6 SCE-BRK Board

PICK/HOLD Adjust

Figure 2.7 Brake Timing

Jumper JP1

Brake Transformer The transformer powering the brake board can be set from 80 VAC to 280 VAC depending on tap settings and whether taps are connected in series or parallel.

Maximum power is 300 VA. This setting is made at the factory per your configuration selections.

If you are unable to achieve adequate brake current, check transformer wiring. If the windings are wired in parallel; rewire in series.

If coil current is excessive, check transformer wiring. If the windings are wired in series; rewire in parallel.

2-37

Configuration and Troubleshooting

SCE-CON Board

The SCE-CON board is an interface between car-mounted equipment and the elevator controller. The SCE-CON board is connected to the elevator controller using a CAN serial connection and additional conductors as required through the traveller and connects to the landing system and car call serializing boards through local CAN and discrete connections.

Figure 3. SCE-CON Connector Board

Landing System IO

24VDC Supply from controller

See job prints

External CAN

Landing System IO

Landing System IO

24V Output to COP Board

1 (ground) and 2 (110VAC)

Local CAN

Local CAN

Table 2.8 SCE-CON Connector Assignments

Connector

J5

J5

J5

J5

J2

J2

J2

J2

J1

J1

J1

J1

J2

J3, Pin 1

J3, Pin 2

J3, Pin 3

J3, Pin 4

J4

J4

J5

Assignment

1

2

SHLD

2

1

24V

COM

SPD0

SPD0

SPD1

DZF

24CTP

CANH1

CANL1

CANH2

CANL2

SPD1

SPD2

SP1A

SP2A

Description

Speed bit 0 from the LS-EDGE landing system

Speed bit 1 from the LS-EDGE landing system

Front Door Zone signal from the LS-EDGE landing system

24VDC fused power out (F1 is 72V, 1100mA)

CAN port 1, H

CAN port 1, L

CAN port 2, H

CAN port 2, L

CAN shield

120VRMS from machine room

Ground

120VRMS to load weigher

Ground

24V to first MC-CPI-2 board

Common for 24V

Speed bit 0 from LS-EDGE sensor

Speed bit 1 from LS-EDGE sensor

Speed bit 2 from LS-EDGE sensor

Position bit

Position bit

2-38 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.8 SCE-CON Connector Assignments

J6

J7

J7

J7

J6

J6

J6

J6

J6

J6

J6

J6

J5

J5

J5

J5

J8

J8

J8

J8

J8

J7

J7

J7

J8

Connector Assignment Description

SP3A

DZR M

SP4A

CGND

CANH2

CANL2

DZF M

CANH1

Position bit

Door Zone Rear

Position bit

Pins 9 and 10. Chassis ground.

CAN port 2, H

CAN port 2, L

Door Zone Front

CAN port 1, H

12V BAT

CANL1

12V, Battery output

CAN port 1, L

DGND Ground

V UNREG Unregulated ~24V

CGND Pins 9 and 10. Chassis ground.

SNN1 Unused

V UNREG

CANH2

Unregulated ~24V from machine room

CAN port 2, H

CANL2

Pins 4, 6

M1, M2

SNN 2

V UNREG

CANH2

CANL2

Pins 4, 6

M1, M2

CAN port 2, L

Ground

Chassis ground

Unused

Unregulated ~24V from machine room

CAN port 2, H

CAN port 2, L

Ground

Chassis ground

2-39

Configuration and Troubleshooting

SCE-CPU

The SCE-CPU board provides system logic and control. The touchscreen is mounted on this board as are machine room control switches.

2-40 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

CPU Switches, Interface CPU board controls are shown below.

Fault Reset Reset PLD

Reset Processor A Unintended Motion

Reset

Earthquake Reset

Inspection UP/DOWN

Reset Processor C

Reset Processor B

Inspection Enable

TEST/PRETEST

Jumpers. See next page.

DIP Switch, 8 position

Hoistway door bypass

Car door bypass

INSP/NORM mode

Battery

• Earthquake Reset: Press to reset earthquake fault.

• Unintended Motion Reset: Press for 6 seconds to reset UIM fault and Emergency Brake.

• Fault Reset: Press to reset latching faults.

• PLD & Processor Resets: Steadily lighted indicators for the PLD and Processors indicate proper function. Press the Reset to reboot the associated processor or PLD.

• Test/Pretest: Placing the car on Pretest causes it to service any registered car calls but not respond to hall calls. When car calls are satisfied, the idle car will recall to the programmed floor or remain at the last floor served if no recall floor is programmed. Door action at the capture floor is also programmable.

Placing the car on Test mode allows a technician or adjuster to exercise the car at normal operating speed but disables doors to prevent entry. Car calls may be placed through the touch screen.

• Machine Room Inspection: Placing the INSP/NORM switch in the INSP position puts the car on machine room inspection operation. In this mode, the car will run at inspection speed in response to the Enable and Up or Down switches being pressed and held. The car will stop when the switches are released.

• Door Bypass: Placing a switch in the Bypass position will allow the car to be run in the absence of the normal Car door and/or Hoistway door inputs (door limits, lock contacts, position monitor).

• CPU Battery: In the event of a power loss, the battery maintains critical memory. The paper insulator must be removed for the battery to operate properly. CR2032, lithiummanganese, 3.0 V, 225mAh. ANSI 5004LC. Replace if below 2.7 VDC.

2-41

Configuration and Troubleshooting

• Jumpers: ( “SCE-CPU Testpoints and Jumpers” on page 2-44

)

• JP1, CDBPTST: ON enables Car Door Bypass regardless of switch position or functionality; OFF is the normal position for the jumper.

• JP2, HDBPTST: ON enables Hoistway Door Bypass regardless of switch position or functionality; OFF is the normal position for the jumper.

• JP3, MCE only. Factory set to configure CE bus.

• JP4, FLT Bypass: To bypass faults:

• Construction Mode: FLT BYPASS jumper to BYPASS. UTILS/CONSTRUCTION

FAULT BYPASS ON. Car on INSPECTION (Cartop). Bypasses controller response to most faults. Bypass remains active, even across power cycles, until set to NORM.

• Inspection Mode: FLT BYPASS jumper to BYPASS. UTILS/INSPECTION FAULT

BYPASS ON. Car on INSPECTION. Bypasses controller response to many faults.

Bypass remains active, even across power cycles, until set to NORM.

• Automatic Mode: FLT BYPASS jumper to BYPASS. UTILS/AUTOMATIC MODE

FAULT BYPASS ON. Bypasses controller response to some faults. Bypass times out after two hours. Countdown visible on Home screen. If more time required, remove and replace FLT BYPASS jumper (in BYPASS position).

• JP5, PGM SOURCE: Factory use only. Leave in default position.

• JP6, EDGE/ENCODER: If the installation uses the MCE LS-EDGE-EL landing system, set to 0. Otherwise set to+.

• JP7, EDGE/ENCODER: If the installation uses the MCE LS-EDGE-EL landing system, set to EDGE. Otherwise set to ENCODER.

• JP8, PGM SOURCE: Factory use only. Leave open.

• JP9, ENCODER INTERFACE: Normally closed.

• JP10, A/B: Set at MCE depending upon the serial drive interface required -

A = TORQMAX/KEB

B = MAGNETEK

• JP11, ENCODER INTERFACE: Normally closed

• JP12, CAN termination, CAN3: A = terminated, B = unterminated. Used to terminate hall call bus CAN3 at the last controller in a duplex installation or the ONLY controller in Simplex installations.

Duplex Elevator Hall Call CAN3 Interconnect

SCE-CPU

A B

JP12

SCE-CPU

A B

JP12

Terminate second elevator

JP12 jumper in A position

CAN3 to Hall Calls

2-42 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

• CPU DIP Switches:

• 8-position DIP switch S2 is primarily used in MCE final test. During normal operation, all switches should be in the ON (Left) position. The number 1 switch (lower) may be placed in the OFF position (Right) to start a CE fixture self-test. The test exercises all of the characters potentially displayed on the fixture and is viewed on the fixture itself.

• 2-position DIP switch SW5 is used to update system software. Leave in OFF (Left) positions unless updating software.

See “System Software Update” on page 2- 43.

• Testpoints: ( “SCE-CPU Testpoints and Jumpers” on page 2-44 )

System Software Update System software updates are initiated using two-position

DIP switch SW5 on the SCE-CPU board. Before updating, the system first checks for a USB drive in the CPU board USB port. If the update USB drive is present, the system will copy the software from the USB to the micro-SD card, replacing the current version files on the card. The system will then update from one of two stored files on the SD (current version or original factory default) as directed by the DIP switches.

1. Place the car on Inspection and shut off power to the controller.

2. If you are updating from a USB drive, insert it into the USB port on the SCE-CPU board.

3. Position the DIP switches to direct the update:

• Both switches ON (Right): Update all system devices regardless of existing software version.

• Switch 1 (top) OFF, Switch 2 (bottom) ON: Update only when source file is different from existing.

• Switch 1 (top) ON, Switch 2 (bottom) OFF: Update from factory default file on SD. The factory default file is the original source software shipped with the system. (It is a hidden file on the SD card.)

4. Restore power to the controller. The process will begin, either copying USB files first or immediately beginning the update from the SD card.

Depending on how many files are on the USB, there may be a delay of around thirty seconds before copying begins.

Update time depends on the number of devices being updated but is generally about fifteen minutes. The touchscreen keeps you appraised of what is happening but it will go blank for a few minutes while the display processor itself is updating. (The SPC processor LED will flash while the screen is blank to assure you that the process is continuing properly. Each blink equals about 3% complete.)

5. When updating is complete, the touchscreen will tell you to place both switches on the DIP switch back to the OFF (Left) position to resume normal operation.

If new LCD graphics are available, the graphics file will be copied to the display processor as part of the startup sequence.

6. Take car off machine room inspection.

Note

Leave the USB drive in place until the system is fully operational (graphics have completed loading).

2-43

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Figure 2.1 SCE-CPU Testpoints and Jumpers

SPD1 (LS EDGE=1 /

A- (ENCODER=-)

SPD0 (LS EDGE=0) /

A+ (ENCODER=+)

ENCODER I/F (Normally Closed)

JP11 3.3V

ENCODER I/F (Normally Closed)

JP9

MRUP

MRDN

GND

8.2V (CE fix related)

ERR INJ (MCE only)

(Encoder) QEFLT

(Encoder A Chnl) QEA

(Encoder B Chnl) QEB

GND

GND

ISO GND1

24V CE

GND

JP5

MCE 1

2

CE MODE Jumper

GND

MCE SET

5V

A B

JP12

CAN3 Termination

A = ON B = OFF

TPSAF

TPEB34

ISO GND2

JP8

MCE

JUMPERS

TESTPOINTS

FLT BYPASS Jumper

CAR DOOR BYPASS TEST Jumper

HALL DOOR BYPASS TEST Jumper

USB Drive Port

TX (Testpoint (Drive I/F)

RX Testpoint (Drive I/F)

Micro SD Card

GND

SER PORT SELECT Jumper JP10

A=Torqmax/KEB

B=Magnetek

1.8V (used in 24V reg circuit)

GND

2-44 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.9 CPU Connector Assignments

J3

J4

J5

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J8

J9

J9

J9

J6

J6

J6

J7

J5

J6

J6

J6

J5

J5

J5

J5

J9

J9

J9

J10

J10

J10

J10

J10

J11

J11

Connector Assignment

J3

J5

J5

RGOK

+24V

L24V

1

FRA

FRS

FRSA

Description

Hydraulic: Thermal overload and/or oil tank temp shutdown input.

Traction: Rope Gripper OK (not set) input.

OK = 24V. Triggered = 0V.

+24V supply output for use with RGOK.

+24V supply output for use with counterweight derailment detection.

Common

Main landing smoke/fire sensor input. Recall to alternate floor.

Smoke/fire sensor for all landings but the main landing. Recall to main floor.

Fire Service Alternate initiating device, machine room input. Recall to alternate floor.

Fire Service Main initiating device. Recall to main floor.

FRSM

MCE TEST

ICEN/IN1

ICPU/IN2

ICPD/IN3

Do not use.

In car inspection enable / programmable input. See job prints. If the

CONFIG01, Building Setup in-car inspection option is set to Yes, this input may only be used for in-car inspection Enable.

In car inspection UP input / programmable input. See job prints. If the

CONFIG01, Building Setup in-car inspection option is set to Yes, this input may only be used for in-car inspection Up.

In car inspection DOWN input / programmable input. See job prints. If the

CONFIG01, Building Setup in-car inspection option is set to Yes, this input may only be used for in-car inspection Down.

IN4

IN5

IN6

IN1H

Programmable input. See job prints.

Programmable input. See job prints.

Programmable input. See job prints.

Earthquake sensor input. See job prints.

IN2H

1 (pin 1)

Earthquake sensor input. See job prints.

Common. Serial fixtures to CAR.

+24 (pin 2) 24V. Serial fixtures to CAR.

CDATA (pin 3) Data. Serial fixtures to CAR.

1 (pin4) Common. Serial fixtures to HALL.

+24V (pin 5) 24V. Serial fixtures to HALL.

HDATA (pin 6) Data. Serial fixtures to HALL.

CAN, modular See job prints. May be used with MC-CPI-2 board for extra I/O in cabinet.

CAN, modular See job prints.

SHLD Shield connection, landing system/hoistway encoder

B-

B+

Quadrature B-, hoistway encoder

Quadrature B+, hoistway encoder

A-/SPD1

A+/SPD0

DZ

INA

ATU

ATD

ABU

ABD

CTEN

INCP

Quadrature A- (encoder) or SPD1 from LS-EDGE-EL

Quadrature A+ (encoder) or SPD0 from LS-EDGE-EL

Door Zone, input

Access Enable

Top Access, UP direction input

Top Access, DOWN direction input and down access limit

Bottom Access, UP direction input and up access limit

Bottom Access, DOWN direction input

Car top inspection enable input

In car inspection/normal input

2-45

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.9 CPU Connector Assignments

Connector Assignment

J17, MCE

J18

J18

J18

J19, MCE

J19, MCE

J19, MCE

J19, MCE

J19, MCE

J19, MCE

J20

J21, MCE

J22, MCE

J22, MCE

J22, MCE

J22, MCE

J11

J11

J11

J27

J13

J14

J15

J16

J16

J16

J16

J16

J17, MCE

J17, MCE

J17, MCE

J17, MCE

J22, MCE

J22, MCE

J23, MCE

J24, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J25, MCE

J26, MCE

24VDC

CANL3

CANH3

SHLD

PMP

BRP

CONFIG

24VDC

TR_HY

1

USB

MCE TEST

+24VINT

GND

BRPK

BREDC

ICTU

ICTD

INCT

SD MICRO

IO1 - IO8

ETHERNET

PLD JTAG

SHLD

CANL1

CANH1

CANL2

CANH2

FLPC

CTPR

LOPM

1

BRFLT

BROM

MCE TEST

Serial

DCOM

DRE

DPS-

DPS+

DRDY

DRDO

DFLT

NC

Serial

Description

Car top inspection UP button input

Car top inspection DOWN button input

Car top inspection/normal input

Port for SD card event storage.

Programmable Input/Outputs. See job prints.

Ethernet port. Web App configuration/per job use. See job prints.

MCE use only.

CAN shield connection.

CAN connection 1, Low

CAN connection 1, High

CAN connection 2, Low

CAN connection 2, High

Fan/Light power control output

Cartop box power control output

24V power monitor

Common

24VDC

CAN connection 3, Low

CAN connection 3, High

CAN shield connection.

Primary motor contactor

Brake contactor

Door lock string configuration input.

24VDC output

Traction/Hydro default determination.

Common

USB drive port

Do not use.

24V power for 12V source on Brake Board

Ground for 12V source on Brake Board

Brake pick control

Brake enable DC

Brake fault

Brake Contact Monitor

Do not use.

Drive serial control

Drive Common

Drive Enable

Drive power supply negative

Drive power supply positive

Drive Ready input

Drive On input

Drive fault input

No connection

Drive serial control

2-46 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

SCE-HVI

The SCE-HVI board provides a control and input interface to components operating at higher voltages.

Figure 2.2 SCE-HVI Board

Customer

Connections Control Bus Control Bus

Factory

Connections

2-47

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.10 HVI Connector Assignments

J6

J6

J6

J6

J7, MCE

J7, MCE

J7, MCE

J7, MCE

J7, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J8, MCE

J9

J9

J9

J9

J9

Connector Assignment

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J3

J4, MCE

J4, MCE

J4, MCE

J4, MCE

J5, MCE

J5, MCE

J5, MCE

J5, MCE

J5, MCE

J6

UTL

USL1

USL2

DTL

DSL1

DSL2

UETS

DETS

2LS

2LS

PM

BR

2

2

2MV

1

1

USE/BR

UFE/PM

DFE/EB1

DSE/EB2

RG

2LS

2MV

GOV

1

2

RG

EB12

EB1

EB2

EB3

EB4

ESC

GOV

SAFH

SAFC

ESC

Description

Up Terminal Limit input, lighted when switch is closed

Up Slow Limit 1 input, lighted when switch is closed

Up Slow Limit 2 input, lighted when switch is closed

Down Terminal Limit input, lighted when switch is closed

Down Slow Limit 1 input, lighted when switch is closed

Down Slow Limit 2 input, lighted when switch is closed

Up Emergency Terminal Switch input, lighted when switch is closed

Down Emergency Terminal Switch input, lighted when switch is closed

2LS 110VAC input, MCE

2LS 110VAC input, MCE

Motor Contactor power, MCE

Brake Contactor power, MCE

2 bus, 110VAC input, MCE

2 bus, 110VAC input, MCE

2MV bus, 110VAC input, MCE

Common, MCE

Common, MCE

Up Slow Enable output (pulls to ground when valve is activated), active when power is on (110VAC)/BR is brake contactor output for traction application

Up Fast Enable output (pulls to ground when valve is activated), active when power is on (110VAC/PM is motor contactor output for traction application

Down Fast Enable output (pulls to ground when valve is activated), active when power is on (110VAC)/EB1 is emergency brake output for traction

Down Slow Enable output (pulls to ground when valve is activated), active when power is on (110VAC)/EB2 is emergency brake output for traction

Rope Gripper (Not Used in hydraulic applications)

2LS bus, 110VAC

2MV bus, 110VAC

Governor switch

Common

110VAC

Rope Gripper

Emergency Brake

Emergency Brake

Emergency Brake

Emergency Brake

Emergency Brake

Emergency stop switch bypass

Governor, lighted when overspeed switch is closed

Safety string Hoistway, lighted when string is made (110VAC)

Safety string Car, lighted when string is made (110VAC)

Emergency Switch Car, lighted when switch is closed (110VAC)

2-48 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.10 HVI Connector Assignments

Connector Assignment

J10

J10

J10

J10

J11

J11

J11

J11

J12, MCE

J12, MCE

J12, MCE

GS

DLAT

DLMS

DLAB

DCOM

NDF

DCF

DOF

GPI

GPO

SAFC

Description

Gate Switch input, lighted when string is closed (110VAC)

Door Lock Top string input, lighted when string is closed (110VAC)

Door Lock Middle String input, lighted when string is closed (110VAC)

Door Lock Bottom string input, lighted when string is closed (110VAC)

Common

Nudging Front

Door Close Function

Door Open Function

*General Purpose (In)

*General Purpose (Out)

Car safety string

*GPI/GPO, if used, will be shown in the prints for the job. They may be used for cycle testing or for other purposes.

Table 2.11 HVI Testpoints

Use TP

AGND

DGND

TPMSAF

+24V

TP1

TP2LS

TPEB3

TPEB4

TPEB34

Analog ground

Digital ground

MSAF monitor voltage

+24V

Common

2LS Bus

Emergency brake

Emergency brake

Emergency brake

2-49

Configuration and Troubleshooting

SCE-UPD

The SCE-UPD board provides power distribution to various boards and components.

Figure 2.3 SCE-UPD Board

Table 2.12 UPD Connector Assignments

J4

J4

J5

J5

J3

J3

J3

J4

J5

J5

J5

J5

J5

J2

J2

J3

J3

J1

J1

J2

J2

Connector Assignment

LOPM

1

24VDC

FLN

1

2

FLI

FLO

1

FAN

24HWY

24FS

24CTP

1

FLPC

CTPR

2

2LS

2LS

DLN2

DLN1

Description

Common

120VAC supply

24V hoistway supply

24V hoistway supply

24V cartop supply

Common (x3 pins)

Fan/light power control input from SCE-CPU

24V CTPWR power relay, 24CTP/24HWY

Monitor, loss of 24VAC from transformer (24VDC supply)

Common

24VDC supply

120VAC lighting/fan power output neutral

120VAC lighting/fan power output

Fan, Light control to cartop

Common.

Primary 120VAC bus.

Primary 120VAC bus.

120VAC, locks and safeties made.

120VAC, locks and safeties made.

Fused line output to door operator

Fused line output to door operator

2-50 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.12 UPD Connector Assignments

J5

J6

J6

J6

J7

J7

J7

J7

J5

J6

J6

J6

J7

J8

J8

Connector Assignment

GOS2

GOS1

X1B

X2B

XD1

XD2

XL1

XL2

2LS

2MV

GOV

1

2

1

24VDC

Description

Governor overspeed circuit

Governor overspeed circuit

Common from transformer

120VAC from transformer

L1 input (or LA from HAPS unit)

L2 input (or LB from HAPS unit)

20VAC input from transformer

20VAC input from transformer

120VAC, locks, safeties made

120VAC monitor voltage

120VAC for governor overspeed switch

Common

120VAC Bus

Common

Fused 24VDC output

Table 2.13 UPD Bus Protection

Bus

FDLN2

FDLN1

FGOV

FFLO

F24FS

F24HWY

F24CTP

F2MV

F2

FXL1

FXL2

F24VDC

Use

Door operator

Door operator

Governor

120VAC car lighting and fan

24V, Fire Signal

24VDC hoistway

24VDC cartop

120VAC monitor

120VAC Bus

20VAC transformer

20VAC transformer

24VDC to SCE-CPU

Fuse

4A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

4A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

4A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

6A, 250V Bussman AGC/Littelfuse 312

2A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

2A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

2A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

3A, 250V Bussman MDQ/Littelfuse 313

2A, 250V Bussman AGC/Littelfuse 312

10A, 250V Bussman AGC/Littelfuse 312

10A, 250V Bussman AGC/Littelfuse 312

6A, 250V Bussman AGC/Littelfuse 312

2-51

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Event and Fault Message Descriptions

The following list of Events will most often reference computer flags monitored by the various processors. When reading the event description, take note of the flags listed. We recommend that you look to the prints to locate the referenced flags. For example, the OBD (on board display touch screen) may display MSAF Input Failure. The Event description asks that we use the diagnostics to verify the status of M2MV, SAFP, and SAFB.

Following the above example, look at page 5 of the wiring prints. In the left margin is a symbol with the name M2MV. A left pointing symbol is an input. Note that there is a smaller text block that reads SPB. This smaller block indicates that Safety Processor B monitors this input. The next step is to take a look at Safety Processor B diagnostics using the OBD tab labeled SPB

DIAG.

• Touch tab SPB DIAG.

• Select SPB INPUTS.

• Scroll to the M2MV.B flag.

We often notate this process using the following sequence: SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs/M2MV.B.

Again using the given example and looking at flag M2MV.B; if the associated flag has an illuminated “LED”, we expect the input to be ON. In this case, we would expect to find 120VAC on the

SCE-HVI board IDC terminal labeled 2MV. Conversely, if the LED was off, we would expect to find zero volts on the IDC. (IDC stands for an Insulation Displacement Connector as opposed to a screw terminal.)

Input Mismatch Faults: During safety redundancy checking, Safety Processors and the PLD will compare the states of safety related inputs. If there is a mismatch, a fault will be issued, i.e.,

“DLT Input Mismatch.” In the following table, these are grouped together as a “’nnn’ Input Mismatch in the first listing. “nnn” Redundancy Faults are likewise grouped in the second table listing.”

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

‘nnn’ Input Mismatch

Description

Software History Revision 219

For purposes of redundant safety checking, all safety-related input states are compared amidst the three Safety Processors (A, B, and C) and the

PLD. If these bits are mismatched, the system will issue a fault unique to the input checked.

System Verifies:

- The reported states do not match.

- Bits related to the input are True.

Correction:

1. Cycle controller power.

2. Monitor for recurrence.

3. Contact MCE technical support.

2-52 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

2 Bus is Low

Event

“nnn” Redundancy Fault

2MV Bus is Low

Alive Input Low

Aux Power: Done

Aux Power: Fail

Aux Power: FireI

Aux Power: FireII

Description

Software History Revision 219

A redundancy fault is logged when two independent monitors (i.e., SPA &

SPB) report a different status for the monitored signal or device. Redundancy faults generally cause the car to shut down (immediately, next available floor, next scheduled floor, depending on the severity of the occurrence). They may be cleared automatically if the condition is momentary. If not, the condition must be corrected before the fault can be manually cleared on the SCE-CPU board.

Correction:

1. Independently verify the status of the signal or device.

2. Check signal connection or path of the erroneous reading; verify correct assignment if an input or output.

3. Correct any hardware problems encountered.

4. Manually reset processor reporting status in error (if any).

5. Contact MCE Technical Support.

2 Bus (120VAC) monitoring input is low. Cannot be bypassed.

1. Check fuse F2 on SCE-UPD board.

2. Verify 120VAC across terminals X1B and X2B on the SCE-UPD.

2MV Bus (120VAC) monitoring input is low. Cannot be bypassed.

1. Check fuse F2MV on the SCE-UPD board.

2. Verify 120VAC across terminals X1B and X2B on the SCE-UPD.

The controller has detected that the Alive input from the other car has gone low, indicating the other car is no longer operating properly.

The car has completed lowering/recall under auxiliary power (HAPS/

TAPS). Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Aux Power Data = APS Recall Done

- APS Done output true

Correction:

1. If in error, verify the status of the spare input programmed for APS.

The car has failed to recall under auxiliary power. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Aux Power Data = APS Recall Fail

Correction:

1. Verify car is not obstructed. Verify doors closed.

2. Check function of HAPS or TAPS unit.

The car is in fire recall mode and on auxiliary power. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- State of fire recall input

- Aux Power Data = APS Fire Recall On

- Mode of operation is not OpModeFireII

Correction:

1. If in error, verify the status of the fire recall related inputs.

The car is on in-car firefighter mode and is recalling on auxiliary power.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Aux Power Data = APS Fire Recall On

- Mode of operation = Fire II

Correction:

1. If in error, verify the in-car firefighter switch wiring.

2-53

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

Aux Power: Recall

BBRAM Read Error

BBRAM Write Error

Bootload Switches On

Bottom Deviation (Edge)

BP Construction

BP CP Construction

BP CP Inspection

Description

Software History Revision 219

The car is recalling under auxiliary power, i.e., a battery powered lowering device. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- State of input

- Aux Power data = APS Recall On

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input programmed for this function.

2. Otherwise, verify status of input and input device.

3. Verify input wiring.

Battery Backed RAM read error detected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Cycle power and recheck.

Battery Backed RAM write error detected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Cycle power and recheck.

Informational.

Correctional:

1. If in error, verify SCE-CPU DIP SW5 switches are in off (left) position.

LS-EDGE-EL encountered terminal magnets that do not match learned positions. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Learned versus current-read magnet locations do not match within an acceptable tolerance.

Correction:

1. Verify magnets for terminals have not been changed.

2. Relearn terminal magnets location by performing a floor learn.

Machine room inspection and construction operation are active and one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches is in the Bypass position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeOfOperation = OpModeConstructionBP

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 )

Car panel inspection and construction operation are active and one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches is in the Bypass position.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeOfOperation = OpModeConstructionBPCP

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 )

Car Panel inspection is active and one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door

Bypass switches is in the Bypass position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeofOperation = OpModeInspectionBPCP

Correction:

1. Turn off one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches.

2-54 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

BP CT Construction

BP CT Inspection

BP Inspection

BR Failed to Turn Off

BR Failed to Turn On

Brake Pick Sw Closed

Brake Pick Sw Flaky

Brake Pick Sw Open

BRFLT is On

Event

BRP Failed to Turn Off

Description

Software History Revision 219

Cartop inspection and construction operation are active and one or both

Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches is in the Bypass position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeofOperation = OpModeConstructionBPCT

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 )

Cartop inspection is active and one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door

Bypass switches is in the Bypass position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeofOperation = OpModeInspectionBPCT

Correction:

1. Turn off one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches.

Machine Room inspection is active and one or both of the Car/Hoistway

Door Bypass switches is in the Bypass position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- ModeofOperation = OpModeInspectionBP

Correction:

1. Turn off one or both of the Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches.

Traction Only. Brake contactor failed to open. Cannot be bypassed.

Traction Only. Brake contactor failed to close. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Issued if brake pick switch is not in expected position after an attempt is made to pick the brake. Performed only upon intent to move. When brake is picked, pick switch must open the input terminal within three seconds. If not, car will stop at the next floor after fault detection. If this fault occurs three times in succession, a latched fault will be generated.

Correction:

1. Verify switch mounting, function, and wiring.

Issued if brake pick switch leaves correct position after brake has been picked. Performed only upon intent to move. After the brake is picked, the brake pick switch must maintain a disconnected input terminal for at least 1 second. If not, the car will stop at the next floor after fault detection. If this fault persists, an Excessive Faults event will be declared.

Correction:

1. Verify switch mounting, function, and wiring.

Issued if brake pick switch is not in expected position before an attempt is made to pick brake. Performed only upon intent to move.When the brake is dropped, the pick switch must ground the input terminal within three seconds. If not, car will be prevented from starting. If this fault occurs three times in succession, a latched fault will be generated.

Correction:

1. Verify switch mounting, function, and wiring.

Traction Only. The BRFLT input to the SCE-CPU board is high. Cannot be bypassed.

Traction Only. NC auxiliary contact for BR contactor failed to drop out.

When idle, this input should be at 24VDC Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check BRP IDC terminal on SCE-CPU board for 24VDC. When BR contactor is dropped, BRP should go low.

2-55

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

BRP Failed to Turn On

Capture Mode

Car Calls Disabled

Car Delayed

Car Delayed Door Closed

Car Delayed Door Open

Car Hold

Car Stop Sw Bypassed

Car Stop Sw On

Car Stop Sw on Re-Level

Description

Software History Revision 219

Traction Only. NC auxiliary contact for BR contactor failed to open. When idle, this input should be activated. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check BRP screw terminal on SCE-CPU board for 24VDC. When BR contactor is picked, BRP should go low.

Controller in Capture Mode. The elevator will not accept hall calls but will answer car calls. Intent is to service existing passengers until car is idled at a floor and available for maintenance or test. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Mode of operation = Capture

Correction:

1. Check that the Test switch is not in the Pretest position.

Car calls have been disabled. Typically caused by car operation in a mode or during a fault condition in which car calls are not active.

Correction:

1. If in error, check Home screen to see what mode of operation is displayed and if any faults are displayed.

2. Troubleshoot the active mode and/or fault condition.

The car has been delayed in leaving a floor for a time exceeding the Car

Delayed Timer setting. If delay continues in excess of Car Out of Service timer setting, the car will be removed from hall call service. Faultbypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Car Flags = Car Delayed

Correction:

1. Check for obstructed doors or door operator malfunction.

The car has been delayed in answering a registered call while the doors are closed. Informational. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction -

1. Check the Car Delayed Timer setting. It might be too short.

2. Check for any faults that might be preventing the car from moving in a timely manner.

The car has been delayed in answering a registered call while the doors are open. Informational. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction -

1. Check the Car Delayed Timer setting. It might be too short.

2. Check for any faults that might be preventing the car from moving in a timely manner.

The car is on hold and not allowed to move. Used for the EMS Hold function initiated when the car is on in-car EMS mode and the in-car EMS switch is deactivated while the car is away from the EMS floor.

The car stop switch is being bypassed. Normally due to PH1 Fire.

Car stop switch input active. If moving, the car will perform an emergency stop. Doors will not be allowed to move. The event will end when the switch is returned to the off position.

Correction:

1. If in error, troubleshoot the SAFC input and the switch.

Car stop switch activated during releveling. Car will complete releveling.

Doors remain operational. Informational event. Resets when switch returned to Off position.

2-56 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

Cartop Construct/Bypass

Cartop Construction

Cartop Insp./Bypass

Cartop Inspection

CDB Switch Fault

Cell Battery Volts Low

CFG Err: 2-Stop Config

CFG Err: Car Panel Insp

CFG Err: Controller Type

Description

Software History Revision 219

The car is on cartop inspection with the door bypass switch in the bypass position.

The car is operating in construction mode from the cartop station.

The car is on cartop inspection with the door bypass switch in the bypass position.

The car is on Cartop Inspection mode. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Inspection CT

Correction:

1. If in error, verify cartop inspection inputs. 24VDC at INCT disables car top inspection.

Generated when the CDB and CDBO inputs are in the same state indicating a possible failure of the car door bypass switch.

Correction:

1. Toggle the car door bypass switch and verify that the diagnostic LEDs for the switch also toggle (CDB, CDBO). PLD Inputs, screen 1.

2. Verify that the CDBTST jumper is inserted in the OFF position.

Low SCE-CPU battery voltage. Battery backs-up run time parameters.

Informational. Replace battery.

Generated when a car is set to be a two stop installation and the CONFIG terminal is low (0V). Alternatively, when the car is set to be more than two stops and the CONFIG terminal is high (+24V). Also generated if both the CONFIG terminal and the DLMS terminal are high (+24V).Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify top and bottom floor settings in the Building Setup menu.

2. Check voltage at the CONFIG terminal matches the settings.

3. Check voltage at the DLMS terminal matches settings.

User defined car panel inspection settings and car panel inspection hardware configuration do not match. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify touch screen settings against job prints.

2. Verify actual installation against job prints.

The user defined controller type (Traction/Hydraulic) does not match the hard wired default at SCE-CPU input TR_HY. (TR_HY at ground for traction applications; TR_HY at 24VDC for hydraulic applications.) Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify correct controller type on touch screen (CONFIG 01/Building

Setup/Controller Type).

2. Verify state of SCE-CPU board TR_HY input (IDC, upper right edge of

SCE-CPU board). If not in accordance with description above, contact

MCE.

2-57

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

CFG Err: Hoist. Access

CFG Err: Invalid Floor

CFG Err: Landing System

Commercial Power Loss

Compliance Test Active

Config Storage

Construction Invalid

Contract Ovrspd

Copying Files to USB

CP Construction

CP Ins Stuck Input

Description

Software History Revision 219

User defined hoistway access settings and the access hardware configuration do not match. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Hoistway access option set to disabled and one of the access inputs

(INA, ATU, ATD, ABU, ABD) is active.

2. Hoistway access option set to bottom and one of the top access inputs

(ATU, ATD) is active.

3. Hoistway access option set to top and one of the bottom access inputs

(ABU, ABD) is active.

An invalid floor has been programmed.

Configured and actual landing system do not match.

Appears in the event log if commercial power is lost. Informational.

A compliance/safety test has been initiated but is not yet completed.

Correction:

1. Complete or abort the test.

EEPROMs being configured. Should not occur if software is not being updated. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Cycle controller power.

2. If message recurs, contact MCE.

Car is in construction operation but controller switches or inputs are in states not valid in construction operation. If stopped, the car will not leave the floor. If in motion, the car will stop at the next floor and shut down. The fault must be manually cleared before operation resumes.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Construction Invalid

Correction:

1. To exit construction operation see

Construction Operation on page 1-8

.

Traction Only. Controller has detected contract overspeed. Power will be removed from brake and motor to bring the car to an immediate halt.

The car will then move at correction speed to the nearest floor, cycle its doors to release passengers, then shut down. A manual reset is required to restore operation. Cannot be bypassed.

Files are being copied from the USB drive to the SD-RAM card.

The car is on construction operation and is being operated from the car panel inspection station. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Construction CP

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 ).

Car Panel Inspection Enable, Up, and Down inputs are monitored in all modes of operation. This fault is asserted if any of the three is high when the car is on Automatic mode or is detected as stuck during Inspection mode. This fault does not affect car behavior on Inspection mode. On

Automatic modes, the car is allowed to answer its first call. The CP Ins

Stuck Input Flt is then asserted if the car is already at a floor or has reached a floor. See description below. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check all car panel inspection related inputs, switches, and wiring

(SCE-CPU ICEN, ICPU, and ICPD).

2-58 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

CPIx is Offline

Event

CP Ins Stuck Input Flt

CT Construction

CT Ins Stuck Input

CT Ins Stuck Input Flt

Cycle Test - “nnn”

Cycle Test M2L

Cycle Test MSAF High

Description

Software History Revision 219

A stuck Car Panel Inspection input has been asserted (see description above) and the car is already at a floor or has reached a floor. The doors open to release passengers and the car removes itself from service. Fault bypassed in Construction mode.

Correction:

1. Check all car panel inspection related inputs, switches, and wiring

(SCE-CPU ICEN, ICPU, and ICPD).

One of the CPI boards is not communicating with main processor.

Correction:

1. Check power supply connections to CPI board.

2. Check CAN connections to CPI board.

3. Contact MCE; possible defective CPI board.

The car is on construction operation and is being operated from the cartop inspection station. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Construction CT

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 ).

Cartop inspection Enable, Up, and Down inputs are monitored in all modes. This fault is asserted if any of the three is high when the car is on

Automatic mode or is detected as stuck during inspection mode. This fault does not affect car behavior on inspection mode. On automatic modes, the car is allowed to answer its first call. The CT Ins Stuck Input

Flt is then asserted if the car is already at a floor or has reached a floor.

(See description below.) Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check all Car Top Inspection related inputs, switches, and related wiring (SCE-CPU CTEN, ICTU, and ICTD).

A stuck Cartop Inspection input has been asserted (see above) and the car is already at a floor or has reached a floor. The doors open to release passengers and the car removes itself from service. Fault bypassed in

Construction mode.

Correction:

1. Verify switches and wiring on SCE-CPU inputs CTEN, ICTU, and ICTD.

Before departing a floor, code requires safety related inputs be tested to ensure they are in the proper state. If an error is found, a Cycle Test fault specific to the problem input will be displayed. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify installation, condition, and connections for the specified equipment.

Reset fault. Go to PLD Diag/PLD Inputs; view flag M2L. Place a call for a landing. M2L must turn off when doors open and stay off until door locks are reestablished. If doors are operating properly, SCE-HVI board may be faulty.

Reset fault. Go to SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs: View flag MSAF B. Place a call for a landing. MSAF B must turn off when doors open and stay off until door locks are reestablished. If doors are operating properly, SCE-HVI board may be faulty.

2-59

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event Description

Software History Revision 219

DFE/EB1 Stuck Off

DFE/EB1 Stuck On

DFLT is On

DFLT Off

Dispatch Load

Down Fast Enable or emergency brake outputs remain off when commanded to be active. No bypass in any mode.

Correction:

1. Verify emergency brake output is correctly connected.

2. Verify function of emergency brake unit.

DFE/EB1 reset issued but outputs remain on. No bypass in any mode.

Correction:

1. Verify emergency brake output is correctly connected.

2. Verify function of emergency brake unit.

Drive has faulted. Not generated in construction operation. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

1. Verify status of DFLT input.

2. Check drive for fault indication and troubleshoot.

Drive has faulted. The car will perform an emergency stop with the motor contactor and brake contactor immediately dropped. Cannot be bypassed.

1. Check the drive display and correct the fault. Reset the drive.

The car load has surpassed the designated load point for lobby departure and will automatically prepare to leave the lobby floor. This is not a normally supported input and should not appear unless the installer has configured a spare input to support it and the load weigher used supports this function. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Status of input.

- Load Data = Load Dispatch

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input is programmed for this function.

2. Otherwise, verify state of input and input device.

3. Calibrate load weigher.

4. Verify input wiring.

Dispatcher Comm Loss

Door Faults Information:

Flag Definitions - DOL Door Open Limit, DPM Door Position Monitor, GS Gate Switch (car door lock), DLAB

Door Lock Access Bottom, DLAT Door Lock Access Top, DLMS Door Lock Mid String, DCL Door Close Limit.

Normal Open State: DOL=0=DPM=GS=(DLAB/DLAT/DLS depending on car location), DCL=1.

Normal Closed State: DOL=1=DPM=GS=DLAB=DLAT=DLMS, DCL=0.

DLAB Open-Running

The dispatching controller has lost CAN communication with the other controller.

The bottom door lock string was not made during a run. The car will make an emergency stop.

Correction:

1. Verify DLAB input electrically and mechanically.

2. Trouble shoot door lock string.

DLAT Open-Running Asserted if the top floor door lock string is not made during a run. The car will make an emergency stop.

Correction:

1. Verify DLAT input electrically and mechanically.

2. Trouble shoot lock string.

2-60 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

DLMS Open-Running

DOB Bypass

DOB Fail

Event

DOL Low - DCL Low

DOL Low - DLAB High

DOL Low - DLAT High

DOL Low - DLMS High

Description

Software History Revision 219

Asserted if the middle door lock string is not made during a run. The car will make an emergency stop.

Correction:

1. Verify DLMS input electrically and mechanically.

2. Trouble shoot lock string.

The Door Open Button is stuck. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags, Stuck DOB Timer = Elapsed

- Door Flags, DOB Bypassed and DOB Failed are not true.

Correction:

1. Verify input and switch.

2. See if continuously active on System IO/Programmed Inputs, DOB.

The door open button has failed. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = DOB Failed

Correction:

1. Verify DOB switch and wiring.

2. Verify door operator functioning properly.

Door open and close limits are not made (DOL and DCL = 0). Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if Door Contact FLT Latch option not set. If option is set, fault is latched and car taken out of service. When latched, fault is cleared using Fault Reset button. Once at a floor car is not allowed to start a new run until fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check door open and close limit inputs and contacts.

Car is at bottom floor with doors open but bottom door lock string is made (DOL = 0, DLAB = 1). Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if Door Contact FLT Latch option is not set. If option is set, fault is latched and car is taken out of service. When latched, fault is cleared using Fault Reset button. Once at a floor, car is not allowed to start a new run until fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check door open limit and bottom door lock string inputs and contacts.

Car is at op floor with doors open but top door lock string is made (DOL =

0, DLAT = 1). Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if

Door Contact FLT Latch option is not set. If option is set, fault is latched and car is taken out of service. When latched, fault is cleared using Fault

Reset button. Once at a floor, car is not allowed to start a new run until the fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check door open limit and top door lock string inputs and contacts.

Car is at a floor other than top or bottom with doors open but door lock string is made (DOL = 0, DLMS = 1). Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if the Door Contact FLT Latch option is not set. If the option is set, the fault is latched and the car is taken out of service. When latched, the fault is cleared using the Fault Reset button. Once at a floor, the car is not allowed to start a new run until the fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check door open limit and middle door lock string inputs and contacts.

2-61

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Door Bypass Construct

Door Bypass Inspection

Door Close Fail 1 (2, 3)

Door Hold

Event

DOL Low - DPM High

DOL Low - GS High

Door Close Fault

Door Fault Shutdown

Description

Software History Revision 219

Doors are open but DPM limit is made (DOL = 0, DPM = 1). Fault is selfresetting and does not affect car behavior if Door Contact FLT Latch option is not set. If option is set, fault is latched and car is taken out of service. If latched, fault is cleared using the Fault Reset button. Once at a floor the car is not allowed to start a new run until the fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check door open and position monitoring limit inputs and contacts.

The door open limit and car gate switch positions are conflicting (DOL =

0, GS = 1). Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if the

Door Contact FLT Latch option is not set. If the option is set, the fault is latched and the car is taken out of service. When latched, the fault is cleared using the Fault Reset button. Once at a floor, the car is not allowed to start a new run until the fault is cleared.

Correction:

1. Check the door open limit and car gate switch inputs and contacts.

Car on construction mode with car door bypass switch in bypass position.

Car on Inspection mode with car door bypass switch in bypass position.

Detected for each failed attempt to close the doors at a destination floor.

Cleared if the doors successfully close. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags, Door Command Data, Door Close Fail = 1 (2, 3)

Correction:

1. Check all door contacts.

2. Check for correct door operation and speed.

3. Check fuses FDLN1 and FDLN2.

Doors have tried and failed to close three times. (See Door Close Fail 1 -

3.) All calls are canceled. Cleared when doors successfully close or by pressing fault reset button. Also cleared by cycling controller power or if mode of operation is changed. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door close fault flag

Correction:

1. Check all door contacts.

2. Check fuses FDLN1, FDLN2.

3. Check for correct door operation and speed.

The door has failed to close after three closing cycles have been attempted. Doors will fully open and the car will shut down. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

The Door Hold input is active. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags, Door Hold Data, Door Hold Function active.

Correction:

1. If in error, check wiring (be sure that door hold timer has expired).

2-62 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

DRDY is Off

Event

Door Open Fail 1 (2, 3)

Door Open Fault

Door Unintended Motion

Doors Closed Not Locked

DPM Low - DLK High

DPM Open-Running

Description

Software History Revision 219

Detected for each failed attempt to open the doors at a destination floor.

Cleared if the doors successfully open. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags, Door Command Data, Door Open Fail = 1 (2, 3)

Correction:

1. Check all door contacts.

2. Check the user defined Open Time Limit.

3. Check for correct door operation and speed.

4. Check fuses FDLN1, FDLN2.

Doors have tried and failed to open three times. (See Door Open Fail 1 -

3.) All calls are canceled. Door may be opened with constant pressure on door open button. Cleared when doors successfully open or by pressing fault reset button. Also cleared by cycling controller power or if mode of operation is changed. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door open fault flag

Correction:

1. Check all door contacts.

2. Check the user defined Open Time Limit.

3. Check for correct door operation and speed.

4. Check fuses FDLN1, FDLN2.

Traction Only. The car has drifted more than three inches from a door zone with the gate and hall doors open. The emergency brake will deploy.

Fault-bypassed in Construction. Requires manual reset.

Correction:

1. Verify proper machine brake adjustment and condition.

2. Verify counterweighting is correct for car rated load.

3. Verify door switches, contacts, and locks.

Car is at a floor with doors fully closed but locks are not made. The car is prevented from starting a new run.

Correction:

1. Check DPM, car gate switch, and all door lock strings.

The door position monitor switch is open but the door locks are made.

Fault is self-resetting and does not affect car behavior if the Door Contact

Flt Latch option is not set. If the option is set, the fault is latched and the car is taken out of service. When latched, the fault is cleared using the

Fault Reset button. Fault bypassed in Construction mode.

Correction:

1. Check door position monitoring and door lock string inputs and related circuitry. DPM should make 2 inches before locks.

Asserted if the door position monitoring switch is not made during a run.

The car will make an emergency stop.

Correction:

1. Verify DPM input parameter.

2. Verify DPM input electrically and mechanically.

Drive ready input is off. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

1. Check the drive or starter for fault indication and troubleshoot.

2. Verify DRDY output and input to SCE-CPU.

2-63

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

Drive RX Communication

Drive RX Message

Drive TX Communication

Drive TX Message

DRO Failed to Turn Off

DRO Failed to Turn On

DSE/EB2 Stuck Off

DSE/EB2 Stuck On

DSL1 Position High

DSL1 Position Low

DSL1 Speed High-Lower

Description

Software History Revision 219

Traction Only. Serial data from SCE-CPU board to drive has failed. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check connection and cable integrity from SCE-CPU board J27 to drive.

2. Use a scope to check if data is in fact being received by the drive.

Traction Only. Cannot be bypassed.

Traction Only. Serial data from drive to SCE-CPU board has failed. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check connection and cable integrity from SCE-CPU to drive.

2. Use a scope to check if data is in fact being transmitted from the drive.

Traction Only. Cannot be bypassed.

Traction Only. Drive On input failed to deactivate. Cannot be bypassed.

1. Verify drive is being properly disabled at the end of a run.

2. Temporarily disconnect the DRO wire at both ends and use a length of insulated wire between the two. If DRO deactivates properly, replace the shielded wire bundle between the SCE-CPU and the drive.

Traction Only. Drive On input to SCE-CPU board failed to activate.

1. Verify hoist motor to drive connections and voltages. Fault-bypassed in

Construction/Inspection.

2. Verify that the drive is activating its DRO output.

Down Slow Enable/EB2 commanded on but remains in low state. Not bypassed in any mode;

Correction:

1. Verify connection and status of output.

Down Slow Enable/EB2 have been reset but remains in active state.

Bypassed in Inspection or Construction Bypass operation.

Correction:

1. Verify connection and status of output.

The car encountered the DSL1 switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car encountered the DSL1 switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed upon encountering the DSL1 switch. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

2-64 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

DSL1 Speed High-Upper

DSL2 Position High

DSL2 Position Low

DSL2 Speed High-Lower

DSL2 Speed High-Upper

DTL and USLx Are Low

Description

Software History Revision 219

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed plus the delta upon encountering the DSL1 switch. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car encountered the DSL2 switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car encountered the DSL2 switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed upon encountering the DSL2 switch. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed plus the delta upon encountering the DSL2 switch. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The Down Terminal Limit switch and the named Up Slow Limit are both low (open); both cannot be low at the same time. The car will stop at the next floor, cancel all calls, cycle doors to allow passengers to exit, and will not be allowed to move. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Limit inputs DTL and USL low.

- 2 bus has power.

Correction:

1. Verify switches mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify input connections.

3. View touchscreen landing system flags for correct status.

4. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

2-65

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

DTL is Low

Event

Duplicate Car ID

Duplicate Dispatcher

DZF Output Fault (Edge)

E-Brake Dropped

E-Brake Failed to Drop

E-Brake Failed to Pick

E-Brake Unexpected Drop

Description

Software History Revision 219

The Down Terminal Limit switch has opened. If moving down, the car will perform an emergency stop. This switch should not open unless the car overshoots the terminal and opens the switch. The open switch prevents further movement towards the terminal. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- 2 bus has power.

- DTL input is low.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify switches and connections mechanically and electrically.

2. Use System Diag/Landing System to check the state of the switch.

3. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Same ID has been assigned to more than one car. Event is informational.

Both cars in a duplex have been assigned the dispatcher role.

Measured DZ and the 24VDC discrete DZ do not match. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- LS-EDGE-EL is the selected landing system.

Correction:

1. Check for back-fed wires at the cartop board.

2. When reader is sensing a DZ magnet (DZ LED on the reader is on), there should be 24VDC at the DZ terminal.

3. Conversely, there should be about 0VDC at the DZ terminal when reader is not sensing DZ.

The emergency brake has deployed.

Correction:

1. Check the event log to see what messages preceded the brake drop.

2. Troubleshoot to correct the problem.

3. Press UIM reset on SCE-CPU for 8 seconds to reset the brake.

4. Press FLT RST to clear the fault.

The emergency brake/rope gripper failed to drop. The car will not be allowed to move; all calls will be canceled and the doors will be closed.

Bypassed in Construction bypass operation.

Correction:

1. Verify function of emergency brake or rope gripper.

2. If in error, verify brake position switches or monitoring contacts.

3. Verify wiring.

The emergency brake/rope gripper failed to pick. The car will not be allowed to move; all calls will be canceled and the doors will be closed.

Bypassed in Construction bypass operation.

Correction:

1. Verify function of emergency brake or rope gripper.

2. If in error, verify brake position switches or monitoring contacts.

3. Verify wiring.

Emergency brake deployment was not the result of controller direction.

Correction:

1. Verify RGOK connection.

2. Verify emergency brake function.

3. Reset brake (UIM reset for 8 seconds); FLT RST momentarily.

4. Monitor brake function.

2-66 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Earthquake Operation

Earthquake Recall

Earthquake Run

Earthquake Shutdown

EB Cycle Test Fault

Emergency Dispatch

EMS In Car

EMS Recall

Event

EP Comm/Config Shutdown

Description

Software History Revision 219

Logged when earthquake input is activated. Bypassed in Construction bypass operation.

Correction:

1. Check state of inputs EQ SS and EQ CWT.

The car is being recalled on earthquake operation.

The car has performed an emergency stop in response to EQ SS and/or

EQ CWT input activation, has recalled, and is subsequently moving at reduced speed in accordance to the selected earthquake code. Faultbypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Earthquake Data = EQ Run

Correction:

1. Press EQRST on SCE-CPU board to reset.

Per selected earthquake code, car has lowered to closest floor below its emergency stop position, opened its doors, and shut down. Faultbypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Earthquake Data = EQ Shutdown

Correction:

1. Press EQ RST on SCE-CPU board to reset.

Emergency brake failed a cycle test. Car will not be allowed to run.

Correction:

1. Verify emergency brake I/O and power.

Hall call bus has failed and car is operating on emergency dispatching to continue service to building. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Check OBD for message:

3HN comm loss or

Emergency dispatch input (EM DISP) activated.

System Verifies:

- Emergency Dispatch Data = Emerg Dispatch

Correction:

1. Verify hall call functionality.

2. Verify EM DISP input; System IO/Programmed Inputs (must be assigned to a valid input)

Car has completed recall to EMS floor and medical personnel have activated the EMS switch in the car.

Emergency medical service has been initiated.

Correction:

1. If in error, check EMS input.

2. If EMS service has not been activated, verify that no input has been programmed for the EMS function.

Emergency power in effect with dispatching communications lost. Car will shut down. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check Config 03/Emergency Power/Emergency Power Type. If set to

None, check that no spare input has been programmed as EPI. If set to Dispatcher or Overlay, check that there is a spare input programmed as EPI.

2-67

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

EP Recall

Event

EP Recall Done

EP Recall Fail

EP Recall ISV

EP Recall Next Floor

EP Run

EP Shutdown

EQ Emergency Stop

Description

Software History Revision 219

Emergency power is available and the recall process has been initiated.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Recall

- EPI flag = 1 for normal operation (active low logic)

Correction:

1. If in error, check System IO/Programmed Inputs/EPI status.

Car has completed recall to designated recall floor. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Recall Done

Emergency power recall has been initiated but the car has failed to recall.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Recall Fail

Correction:

1. Check that car is on automatic operation with no active faults.

The car is moving toward the recall floor under emergency power. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Recall ISV

Correction:

1. Check EPI status on SPA Diag/Emerg Pwr and Earthquake.

2. EPI input terminal must be 0V for normal operation.

Emergency power is available and a recall to the next floor has been initiated. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. If in error, check System IO/Programmed Inputs/EPI status.

The car has been selected to run under emergency power. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Run

Correction:

1. If in error, check that the EP Run has not been erroneously assigned to an input or, if a valid input has been assigned, verify the electrical state of that input and that it is wired correctly.

2. Verify EP Auto (System IO/Programmed Inputs).

Normal power has been lost and the car is stopped. The car will remain stopped until backup power becomes active or commercial power is restored.

System Verifies:

- EP Data Status = EP Shutdown

Correction:

1. If in error, check status of System IO/Programmed Inputs, EPI.

2. Verify EPI not programmed if not used.

3. If used, verify EPI wiring per job prints.

Earthquake inputs EQ SS or EQ CWT have been activated and the car has performed an emergency stop. Further operation will be per the selected earthquake code. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Earthquake Data = EQ Stop

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs, EQ SS or EQ CWT.

2-68 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

EQ Move

ESC Input Low

Ethernet Error

Fire Bypassed

Event

ETSL Speed High

Event Log Cleared

Event Log Write Fail

Excessive Faults

Description

Software History Revision 219

Traction Only. The car has performed an emergency stop in response to

EQ SS and/or EQ CWT input activation and is subsequently moving at reduced speed in accordance to the selected earthquake code. Faultbypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Earthquake Data = EQ Recall

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs, EQ SS or EQ CWT.

The in-car emergency stop switch bypass input is low. If moving, the car will perform an emergency stop. The doors will not operate.

System Verifies:

- ESC input is low

Correction:

1. If in error, verify input and input device electrically and mechanically.

2. Verify status System IO/System Inputs ESC.

Monitoring processor cannot communicate with the Ethernet chip. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify Ethernet connection.

2. Verify Ethernet settings (Config 03/Network Settings).

3. Reset processor SPC (RSTC button on SCE-CPU board).

Car has encountered ETSL switch at a speed higher than programmed speed at switch. Car will perform an emergency stop then proceed to the terminal at correction speed.

Correction:

1. Relearn limits.

Message will appear momentarily when event log is cleared through the touch screen. System Diag/Event Log/Clear.

Occurs if the SPC processor tries to write an event to the SD card but cannot. Car runs normally.

Correction:

1. Verify SD card is installed; eject and reseat.

2. Clear the event log.

Generated when there are more than ten faults that resulted in an emergency, controlled or ASAP stop. The counter resets if the car makes ten normal runs without faults. The car is taken out of service and all registered calls are canceled. The car will proceed to the next available floor and cycle the doors to let the passengers out. Once at a floor, the “Excessive Faults Shutdown” fault is activated and the car will remain shut down until the Fault Reset button is pressed, Inspection is toggled or power to the controller is cycled. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Access the event log and determine which recent events triggered the fault.

2. Troubleshoot those faults to prevent their recurrence.

Detected when fire service is activated but car cannot perform fire recall due to certain conditions (Inspection, Test, or Independent Service mode active). Cleared as soon as conditions preventing fire recall are cleared.

Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check the current mode of operation and verify that the operation is per the selected user defined fire code.

2-69

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Fire II

Fire II Hold

Fire II Recall

Fire Recall Alt

Event

Fire Recall Done

Fire Recall Main

Fire Recall: FR1 On

Fire Recall: FR1 On2

Description

Software History Revision 219

Fire Phase II, in-car firefighter operation, is active. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Fire II

Correction:

1. If in error, verify in-car fire fighter switch mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify status of System IO/Programmed Inputs/FR2 ON.

3. Verify FR2 ON input is not shorted.

In-car fire fighter switch is in HOLD position. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Op Mode Fire II

- Fire Data = FIRE II HOLD

Correction:

1. If in error, verify in-car fire switch mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify correct wiring per job prints.

3. Verify status of FR2 HOLD flag at System IO/Programmed Inputs.

The doors are closed, the in-car fire switch is off and the car is recalling to the recall floor. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Fire Recall

Correction:

1. If in error, verify programmed Input System IO/Programmed Inputs/

FR2 ON.

The car is recalling to the alternate fire recall floor. At the floor, the car will behave as configured. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Fire Recall Alt

Correction:

1. If in error, verify operation of fire/smoke sensors on main recall floor.

2. Verify sensors wired according to job prints.

3. Verify System IO/System Input/ FRA = on for normal.

The car has completed recall to the designated floor. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Fire Data = Recall Complete

The car is recalling to the main fire recall floor. At the floor, the car will behave as configured. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Fire Main

Correction:

1. If in error, verify operation of fire/smoke sensors on floors other than main recall floor.

2. Verify sensors wired according to job prints.

3. Verify System IO/System Inputs, FRM.

Fire recall initiated by the main fire recall switch (SCE-CPU FR1 ON input active low). Car recalls to the designated fire floor (usually the lobby).

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/FR1 ON = Off for normal.

A spare input programmed for the FR1 ON2 has been activated.

Correction:

1. Verify spare input programming.

2. Check terminal associated with input.

2-70 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Firmware Update

Flood Operation

Flood Recall

Event

Fire Recall: FR2 On

Fire Recall: FRA

Fire Recall: FRS

Fire Recall: FRSA

Fire Recall: FRSM

Floor Unintended Motion

Flt Byp Jumper On

Flt Bypass JP: Time Out

Description

Software History Revision 219

Fire recall initiated by the secondary fire recall switch (SCE-CPU FR2 ON input low). Car recalls to the designated fire floor (usually the lobby).

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/System Inputs/FR2 ON = Off for normal.

Fire recall initiated by fire sensors in the lobby. SCE-CPU FRA input low.

Car recalls to the alternate fire floor.

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/System Inputs/FRA = On for normal.

The dedicated FRS input on the SCE-CPU has been activated.

Correction:

1. Check the main floor fire recall switch.

Fire recall initiated by the fire sensors in the machine room and/or hoistway (SCE-CPU FRSA input low). Car recalls to the alternate fire floor.

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/System Inputs/FRSA = On for normal.

Recall initiated by one or more fire sensors at floors other than the ones at the lobby (SCE-CPU FRS input low). Car recalls to the designated fire floor (usually the lobby).

Correction:

1. Verify System IO/System Inputs/FRSM = On for normal.

Controller firmware has been updated.

Flood operation has been initiated. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no programmable Input Pit Flood is configured.

2. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/Pit Flood and initiating device.

The car is recalling to the designated flood operation recall floor. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Flood Data = Flood Recall

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no programmable Input Pit Flood is configured.

2. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/Pit Flood and initiating device.

The car has drifted more than six inches from the landing with car and hall doors open. The emergency brake will deploy. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. If persistent, verify landing system sensors and connections.

2. Verify machine brake and counterweighting.

3. With car on inspection, press UIM RST on SCE-CPU board for 8 seconds to reset brake.

4. Press FLT RST to reset faults.

The fault bypass jumper on the SCE-CPU board is in the BYPASS position.

Cannot be bypassed.

The fault bypass jumper on the SCE-CPU board is in the BYPASS position and will be effective for the duration of the countdown timer displayed.

When the timer expires the system will ignore the jumper and Fault

Bypass will end. If more time in fault bypass is required, cycle power to the controller to “reset” the jumper or temporarily move the jumper to the OFF position before again placing it in the BYPASS position.

2-71

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

GOV Input Low

GS Open-Running

Hall Calls Bypassed

Hall Calls Disabled

HDB Switch Fault

Heavy Load

Event

Hoist. Access Construct

Hoist. Access Inspection

Hourly Stats Cleared

In-Car Construct/Bypass

Description

Software History Revision 219

The governor input is low. The car will perform an emergency stop, immediately dropping motor and brake contactors. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Application is a Traction machine and the GOV input is low

Correction:

1. If in error, verify governor and input mechanically and electrically.

2. If actual, troubleshoot for overspeed and/or check governor overspeed switch.

Asserted if the car gate switch is not made during a run. The car will make an emergency stop.

Correction:

1. Verify GS input electrically and mechanically.

Hall calls are being bypassed. Typically due to heavy load status of car.

Correction:

Automatically corrected when car load allows additional passenger.

1. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/Load Hvy.

Hall calls have been disabled. Typically due to heavy load status of car.

Correction:

Automatically corrected when car load allows additional passenger.

1. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/Load Hvy.

Generated when HDB and HDBO inputs are in the same state (both low or both high) indicating possible failure of Hoistway Door Bypass Switch.

Correction:

1. Toggle hoistway door bypass switch and verify that diagnostic LEDs

HDB, HDBO also toggle (System IO/System Inputs).

2. Verify HDBPTST jumper is inserted in the OFF position.

The car is loaded beyond the heavy load setting. Under this condition, a moving car will ignore additional hall calls until the load is reduced by passenger departure. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Status of input

- Load Data = Load Heavy

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input is programmed for Load Hvy.

2. Otherwise, verify status of input and input device.

3. Verify input wiring.

4. Verify System IO/Programmed Inputs/Load Hvy.

5. Calibrate load weigher.

The car is on construction operation and hoistway access. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 ).

The car is on Inspection mode and hoistway access. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Inspection HA

Correction:

1. If in error, verify INA input.

Informational. The Hourly statistics register has been cleared. (STATS/

Hourly Statistics)

The car is operating in construction mode from the in-car controls with the door bypass switch in the bypass position.

2-72 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

In-car Construction

In-Car Insp/Bypass

In-Car Inspection

Independent Mode

Inspection Invalid

Invalid Access Zone

Invalid Mode

IO Terminal Mapping Flt

Leveling Overspeed

Description

Software History Revision 219

The car is operating in construction mode from the in-car controls.

The car is on in-car inspection with the door bypass switch in the bypass position.

The car is on Inspection mode and is being operated from the in-car inspection station. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Inspection CP

Correction:

1. If in error, verify car panel inspection inputs.

The car is running on independent mode and will not accept hall calls.

Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

Mode of Operation = Independent

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input programmed IND SERV if IND SERV not available.

2. Verify IND SERV input and initiating device wired per job prints.

Controller unable to establish proper mode of Inspection. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Inspection Invalid

Correction:

1. Verify all inspection inputs mechanically and electrically.

Car has been placed on Inspection Access but is outside the selected access zone.

If in error:

1. Verify car position.

2. Verify CONFIG 02/HOISTWAY SETUP/ TOP|BOTTOM ACCESS DIS-

TANCE.

3. Verify switch wiring.

The car is in an invalid operating mode. Appears temporarily at power up and is immediately replaced with the actual operating mode. If it appeared during normal operation, a running car would perform an emergency stop and shut down. A stopped car would remain stopped and shut down. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = OpModeInvalid or OpModeInspectionInvalid

Correction:

1. Cycle power to the controller.

2. Contact MCE; possible defective SCE-CPU board.

More than one spare input or output are programmed to the same hardware IO terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify spare inputs and outputs.

Leveling overspeed detected. Car will perform an emergency stop and be removed from service.

Correction:

1. Verify landing system connections and configuration (CONFIG2/System Control Parameters/Leveling Overspeed).

2-73

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

LLI Antinuisance

LS-EDGE Boot Correction

LS-EDGE Boot with Error

LS-EDGE Count Error

LS-EDGE Floor Checksum

LS-EDGE Learn Active

LS-EDGE Position Error

LS-EDGE-EL: SPA is Offline

LS-EDGE-EL: SPB is Offline

LS-EDGE: Access Ovrspd

LS-EDGE: ETS Ovrspd

Description

Software History Revision 219

Informational. The light load antinuisance call threshold has been achieved; additional car calls are being canceled. Self resetting. Cannot be bypassed.

If controller loses power, LS-EDGE continues to record position for a short period of time. When power is regained, if LS-EDGE determines that car has moved from last recorded position, it will perform a terminal sync to correct.

Correction:

1. Cycle power. LS-EDGE should clear the message.

2. Verify brake is holding 125% of rated load.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL landing system. LS-EDGE has discovered an error while booting up after a power on or system reset. All calls will be canceled; doors will remain closed. Cannot be bypassed.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL. Position count upon detecting a previously learned magnet is outside acceptable margin. All calls will be canceled; doors will remain closed. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify position of magnet. Reset LS-EDGE.

2. Relearn hoistway if problem persists.

After a learn operation, the landing system and the controller both store the resulting checksum. On power up, the checksums are compared to ensure they match. If they do not, the car will not be allowed to move until a successful learn operation is performed. Bypass in Construction or

Inspection bypass mode.

Correction:

1. Relearn hoistway if problem persists.

Informational message while LS-EDGE is performing a learn operation.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. LS-EDGE has detected a previously learned floor zone or terminal magnet outside learned position margins. If moving, the car will perform an emergency stop. If stopped, the car will not be allowed to move. Bypassed in Construction Bypass mode.

Correction:

1. Verify magnet positions.

2. Relearn hoistway.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. The landing system is reporting that Safety Processor A is not communicating. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Reset processor A (RSTA) on SCE-CPU board.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. The landing system is reporting that Safety Processor B is not communicating. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Reset processor B (RSTB).

LS-EDGE has detected an overspeed while operating on hoistway access.

The LS-EDGE has detected an overspeed at one of the terminal ETS magnets.

Correction:

1. Verify overspeed settings.

2. Relearn terminal switches.

2-74 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

LS-EDGE: Inspect Ovrspd

M2L is Low

M2MV is Low

Machine Room Construct

Machine Room Inspection

Maint. Stats Cleared

MC-CPI (n) is Offline

MDRE Failed to Turn Off

MDRE Failed to Turn On

MEB1 Failed to Turn Off

MEB1 Failed to Turn On

Description

Software History Revision 219

LS-EDGE has detected an overspeed while operating on Inspection mode.

Correction:

1. Verify Inspection Overspeed setting (CONFIG02/System Control

Parameters/Inspection Overspeed).

2. Verify Profile Scale setting (CONFIG02/System Control Parameters/

Profile Scale).

2LS bus unexpectedly low. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify fuse F2MV on SCE-UPD board.

M2MV bus unexpectedly low. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify fuse F2MV on SCE-UPD board.

The car is on construction operation and machine room inspection.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Construction MR

Correction:

1. Exit construction operation ( Construction Operation on page 1-8 ).

The car is on machine room inspection. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Mode of Operation = Inspection MR

1. If in error, verify position of machine room inspection switch.

Informational. The Maintenance statistics register has been cleared.

(STATS/Maintenance Statistics)

The MC-CPI at this ID is offline. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Verify CPI connections and power.

2. Verify CPI ID switches correct and fully on or off.

3. Cycle power to the controller.

4. Contact MCE; possible defective MC-CPI board.

MDRE monitors the solid state drive DRE device. The device did not open when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check the associated wiring.

2. Verify the DRE system output.

3. Contact MCE; possible defective SCE-CPU board.

MDRE monitors the solid state drive DRE device. The device did not close when expected. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Check the associated wiring.

2. Verify the DRE system output.

3. Contact MCE; possible defective SCE-CPU board.

MEB1 monitors the governor overspeed switch. Did not go low when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify DFE/EB1 terminal connection on SCE-HVI board.

2. Verify output on PLD Diag/PLD Flags.

MEB1 monitors the governor overspeed switch. Did not go high when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify DFE/EB1 terminal connection on SCE-HVI board.

2. Verify output on PLD Diag/PLD Flags.

2-75

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

MEB2 Failed to Turn Off

MEB2 Failed to Turn On

MEB2 Redundancy Flt

MEB3 Failed to Turn Off

MEB3 Failed to Turn On

MEB3/4 Redundancy Fault

MEB4 Failed to Turn Off

MEB4 Failed to Turn On

Motor Time Out Shutdown

Description

Software History Revision 219

MEB2 monitors the emergency brake power supply. Did not go low when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify DSE/EB2 terminal connection on SCE-HVI board

2. Verify output on PLD Diag/PLD Flags.

MEB2 monitors the emergency brake power supply. Did not go high when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify DSE/EB2 terminal connection on SCE-HVI board.

2. Verify output on PLD Diag/PLD Flags.

Checks the emergency brake activation logic. MEB2 should be active every other run.

Correction:

1. Check connector at DSE/EB2 on SCE-HVI board. If connection is correct, go to PLD DIAG/PLD INPUTS. View flag MEB2.

2. If MEB2 does not toggle every other run, contact MCE; possibly faulty

SCE-HVI board.

MEB3 monitors the EB3 emergency brake device. EB3 did not go low when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify the EB3 system output, PLD Diag/PLD Outputs/EB3P.

MEB3 monitors the solid state emergency brake device. The device did not close when expected. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify the EB3 system output, PLD Diag/PLD Outputs/EB3P vs. test point EB3 on SCE-HVI board.

Checks emergency brake activation logic. MEB34 should be active every other run.

Correction:

1. Go to SPB DIAG/SPB INPUTS. View flag MEB34 B. This flag should toggle every other run. If not, contact MCE; possibly faulty SCE-HVI board.

MEB4 monitors the EB4 emergency brake device. EB4 did not go low when expected. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify the EB4 system output, PLD Diag/PLD Outputs/EB4P vs. test point EB34 on SCE-HVI board.

MEB4 monitors the solid state emergency brake device. The device did not close when expected. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify the EB4 system output, PLD Diag/PLD Outputs/EB4P vs. test point EB34 on SCE-HVI board.

The CONFIG01 timer, MOTOR/VALVE TIME LIMIT has been exceeded

(typical 5 minutes; max 30 minutes).

Correction:

1. If car stalls in an express zone without door zone magnets it may take more than 5 minutes to arrive at a landing. Increase timer setting to allow sufficient time. Check event log for other events that may have prevented car from moving. Verify no obstructions.

2-76 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

MPSBR Failed to Turn Off

MPSBR Failed to Turn On

MSAF Input Failure

MSAF Is High

MSAF Is Low

No Door Zone Fault

No Leveling Fault

Description

Software History Revision 219

Traction Only. The SCE-BRK module brake output (BR+/BR-) has failed to turn off as reported by the BROM (Brake Output Monitor) input to the

SCE-CPU module. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- BROM is high while BRPK is low

Correction:

1. Verify brake output (SCE-BRK BR+/BR-).

2. Verify BRPK input to SCE-BRK is properly connected and not shorted.

Traction Only. The SCE-BRK module brake output (BR+/BR-) has failed to turn on as reported by the BROM (Brake Output Monitor) input to the

SCE-CPU module. Fault bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- BROM is low while BRPK is high

Correction:

1. Verify brake output (SCE-BRK BR+/BR-).

2. Verify BRPK input to SCE-BRK is properly connected and not shorted.

Generated if:

Code 1: MSAF unexpectedly active when 2MV bus is low.

Code 2: MSAF is unexpectedly inactive when 2MV bus is high and SAFP and SAFB outputs are enabled. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify wiring and voltage on 2MV terminal of SCE-HVI board.

2. Verify status of M2MV, SAFP and SAFB, System IO/System Inputs.

MSAF input unexpectedly high when 2MV bus is low or SAFB or SAFP outputs are inactive. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Verify M2MV, SAFB and SAFP through System IO/System Inputs.

2. Go to SPB DIAG/SPB Inputs. View flag MSAF B. This flag must toggle during door operation as part of the cycle test.

3. Contact MCE; possible faulty SCE-HVI board.

MSAF input unexpectedly low when 2MV bus is high and SAFB and SAFP outputs are active. If stopped, the car will not be allowed to move. If moving, the car will stop at the destination floor and cancel all calls. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Monitoring input MSAF low.

- M2MV bus has power.

Correction:

1. Verify M2MV, SAFB and SAFP through System IO/System Inputs.

DZ signal not seen at end of run. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify DZ system input, PLD Diag/PLD Inputs & SPA Diag/SPA Flags.

2. View DZ LED on SCE-CPU board.

No leveling inputs detected during run. Fault-bypassed in Construction/

Inspection.

Code 1: ULM or DLM detected.

Code 2: Neither ULM nor DLM detected.

Correction:

1. Verify DLM, ULM system inputs, System IO/System Inputs.

2-77

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Nudging

Out of Service

Overload

Overload 2

Event

Parameter Range Fit

Parameter Storage Fault

Passcode Enabled

Passenger Mode

PHE Antinuis. Disabled

PHE Antinuisance

Description

Software History Revision 219

The door is closing in nudging mode. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Nudging

Correction:

1. Check for stuck PHE/DOB/Safe Edge.

2. Check for debris or obstruction in door track.

3. System IO/Programmed Inputs/PHE/DOB/SAFE EDGE.

The COS Timer has elapsed subsequent to the Car Delayed Timer having already elapsed. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Car Flags - Car Out of Service

Correction:

1. Determine the cause of the delay.

2. See Car Delayed for additional information.

Car is loaded beyond overload setting. Buzzer will sound and car will not leave floor until load is below the setting. Not generated in construction operation. Bypassed by FRS.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input is programmed for the Load Over function.

2. Otherwise, calibrate load weigher.

3. Verify status of input and input wiring.

Car is loaded beyond overload setting. Buzzer will sound and car will not leave floor until load is below the setting. Not generated in construction operation. Not bypassed by FRS.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input is programmed for the Load Over 2 function.

2. Otherwise, calibrate load weigher.

3. Verify status of input and input wiring.

When loading stored parameters, some parameters did not pass the valid range check. This message is not necessarily a problem but parameter verification is recommended. This may occur when:

1. Changing software.

2. If a parameter is corrupted.

3. Using parameter files with different versions.

A fault occurred while parameters were being stored. Cannot be bypassed. The car will not be allowed to move.

Correction:

1. If fault occurred while updating software, reset processor C, repeat software update.

2. If fault does not clear, see error code under STORAGE ERROR (SPB

DIAG, SPB NUMERIC). Contact MCE.

While the passcode remains active this message will be displayed on the

Home screen and the car will not respond to hall calls. Please refer to

Passcode on page 1-60

.

Passenger mode active.

Informational. PHE antinuisance feature has been disabled.

Informational. The photo eye antinuisance call threshold has been achieved; all car calls are canceled. Self resetting. Cannot be bypassed.

2-78 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

PHE Bypass

PHE Fail

Event

PLD RX Communication

PLD RX Message

PLD TX Communication

PLD TX Message

PLD Write Fault (Edge)

PLD: Aux Safety Low

PLD: Main Safety Low

PM Failed to Turn Off

PM Failed to Turn On

PMP Failed to Turn Off

Description

Software History Revision 219

The door photo eye/infrared detector has been active for a timer determined period and is now being bypassed. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Photo Eye Bypassed

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input programmed PHE.

2. Check the PHE input.

3. See related Stuck PHE and Bypass Stuck PHE events.

The door photo eye/infrared detector has failed. Issued when the photo eye has been continuously activated for a predetermined time while the doors are fully closed. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Photo Eye Failed

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input programmed if PHE not used.

2. Check that input is properly wired and programmed.

3. System IO/Programmed Inputs/PHE.

No communication received from PLD. Car not allowed to move. Cannot be bypassed.

Message from PLD not properly formed. Car not allowed to move. Cannot be bypassed.

Unable to communicate with PLD. Car not allowed to move. Cannot be bypassed.

Message sent to PLD not properly formed. Car not allowed to move. Cannot be bypassed.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL landing system. The ETS trip value cannot be written to the landing system PLD. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. PLD hardware has failed or software is not loaded.

2. Verify software versions for LS-EDGE-EL.

The PLD reports the Aux Safety input is low. Bypassed in Construction

Bypass mode.

Correction:

1. Verify status of input and connection. Verify safety string.

The PLD reports the Main Safety input is low. Bypassed in Construction

Bypass mode.

Correction:

1. Verify status of input and connection. Verify safety string.

Traction Only. The primary motor contactor failed to drop out at the end of a run. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check PMP LED on SCE-CPU IDC connector.

Traction Only. The primary motor contactor did not pick at the beginning of a run. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check PM contactor coil.

Traction Only. Normally closed Auxiliary contact for PM contact did not pick at end of run. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check PM aux contacts.

2-79

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

PMP Failed to Turn On

Positioning

Processing Car Calls

PTI Recall

PTI Shutdown

Quad Sensor Loss (Edge)

Quadrature Loss CH-B

Quadrature Offset CH-B

Recall Complete

Description

Software History Revision 219

Traction Only. Normally open Auxiliary contact for PM contact did not drop out at beginning of run. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check PM aux contacts.

Car position has not been established. The car is reestablishing position.

Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Car Flag Correction is active.

- Car is not on Inspection or construction operation.

- Car is on Automatic mode

Correction:

1. Car will move to reestablish position at a landing.

Generated while car is continuing to respond to registered car calls subsequent to activation of capture mode (Pretest switch on SCE-CPU) or a recall switch that is configured to answer existing car calls. Once calls are satisfied, the elevator will recall and shut down awaiting test switch activation.

The car is recalling on emergency power operation. Fault-bypassed in

Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. View System IO/Programmed Inputs/PTI.

The car has stopped due to power loss. Fault-bypassed in Construction/

Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Power Transfer Data = PTI Shutdown

Correction:

1. View System IO/Programmed Inputs/PTI.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL landing system. Indicates that one pair of quad differential signals from the landing sensor to the controller has failed.

Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. A hall effect sensor may have failed or the bias magnet is broken or defective.

2. Contact MCE, may be defective LS-EDGE.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL landing system. Indicates that the controller is not receiving the B channel of the quadrature signal stream from the landing sensor. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Initiated by LS-EDGE-EL landing system. Indicates Channel B offset from

Channel A is not correct. Bypassed in Construction or Inspection Bypass operation.

Car has completed recall for the specified mode of operation and is at the user defined recall floor and has completed the configured door operation at that floor. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify inputs and programming (Config 01/Configure Spare

Inputs) for specified recall action.

2-80 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event Description

Software History Revision 219

Recall Done Switch ‘n’ (1, 2, 3, or

4)

Recall Sw: Bypassed

The car has completed recall in response to the indicated recall switch and has completed the configured door operation at the floor. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Recall Data = Recall Switch ‘n’

- Recall Data = Complete

Correction:

1. If in error, verify inputs and programming (Config 01/Configure Spare

Inputs) for specified recall action.

Informational. An active recall switch is bypassed due to a higher mode of operation.

Recall Switch ‘n’ (1, 2, 3, or 4)

Recalling Car is recalling to selected recall floor (fire service, Pretest operation, Aux power, Recalling switches, Floor operation, or PTI input). Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify that the assigned recall input (System IO/Programmed Inputs) is inactive.

2. Verify user defined recall floor.

Recalling Switch ‘n’ (1, 2,3, or 4) The indicated recall switch is active. Hall calls are canceled or reassigned.

Car calls disposition is according to user settings for the switch. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify that the input is wired correctly. If not used, verify that the input is not programmed; (System IO/Programmed Inputs).

Restricted Operation Displayed when the elevator has been locked into a restricted mode of operation. Please contact MCE. 916 463 9200. Informational.

SAFH Input Low

Recall switch “n” has been activated. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Mode of operation = Recall Switch ‘n’

- Recall Data Type = Recall Switch ‘n’

- Recall Data, Complete is not True.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify no input is programmed (Config 01/Configure Spare

Inputs) for this recall switch.

2. Otherwise, verify switch mechanically and electrically.

3. Verify state of input and input wiring.

Saving Dispatch Params

Saving Other Car Params

SD Card Error

The hoistway safety string input is low. Car will perform an emergency stop or, if at a floor, will not move. Doors remain as they are.

System Verifies:

- SAFH Input is low

- SAFC input high

Correction:

1. If in error verify input and input devices mechanically and electrically.

Appears when dispatching related parameters are being saved. Informational.

Appears when parameters communicated by other car in duplex pair are being saved. Informational.

The micro-SD card used for event logging is damaged or improperly formatted. Remove and reseat the card. Replace the card with a new card of like capacity if required. Cannot be bypassed.

2-81

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

SE Bypass

SE Fail

Event

Security Disabled

SPA: DETS Position High

SPA: DETS Position Low

SPA: DETS Speed High

SPA: LS-EDGE is Offline

SPA: Motion Shutdown

SPA: PLD Osc Stopped

Description

Software History Revision 219

The door safe edge input has been bypassed. See SE Fail. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Safe Edge Bypassed

Correction:

1. Verify no input programmed if SE is not used.

2. See SE Fail (Config 01/Configure Spare Inputs).

The door safe edge has failed. Issued when the safe edge has been continuously activated for a predetermined period while the doors are fully closed. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Safe Edge Failed

Correction:

1. Check for obstruction.

2. Check that input is properly wired and programmed (Config 01/Configure Spare Inputs).

Car call security has been disabled. Informational.

SPA reports the car encountered the DETS switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

SPA reports the car encountered the DETS switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at construction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

SPA reports the car was travelling faster than 95% of contract speed upon encountering the Down Emergency Terminal Switch. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at construction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

SPA has detected loss of communication with LS-EDGE.

Correction:

1. Check CAN1 and CAN2 connections on SCE-CPU.

2. Check connections on LS-EDGE.

Bypassed in Construction and Inspection bypass modes. The car will be unable to move until the fault is corrected.

Correction:

1. Check event log.

Safety Processor A is reporting that the timing oscillator for PLD U1 on the SCE-CPU board has failed. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Press the RSTP button on the SCE-CPU board.

2. If the PLD fails to restart, contact MCE.

2-82 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

SPA: PLD Read Error

SPA: SPB is Offline

SPA: SPC is Offline

SPA: UETS Position High

SPA: UETS Position Low

SPA: UETS Speed High

SPB Powerup/Reset

Description

Software History Revision 219

The PLD, responsible for redundant error checking along with the safety microprocessors, has made a read error as reported by Safety Processor

A (SPA). Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- PLD to SPA Data = Rx Error

Correction:

1. Cycle power to the controller.

Safety processor A reports safety processor B is not communicating. The car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and the doors will not be allowed to move. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPB sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press the SCE-CPU board RSTB button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

Safety processor A reports safety processor C is not communicating. The car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and the doors will not be allowed to move. May occur subsequent to an unsuccessful parameter update. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPC sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press the SCE-CPU board RSTC button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

SPA reports the car encountered the Up Emergency Terminal Switch at a position higher than the position learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

SPA reports the car encountered the Up Emergency Terminal Switch at a position lower than the position learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

SPA reports the car was travelling faster than the learned speed plus the delta upon encountering the Up Emergency Terminal Speed switch. Car will perform an emergency stop, then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Safety Processor B is resetting due to power up. The car is not allowed to move. Doors will remain in current state. Cannot be bypassed This is a normal event during power up. Informational.

2-83

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

SPB: DETS Position High

SPB: DETS Position Low

SPB: DETS Speed High

SPB: Inspect Ovrspd

SPB: LS-EDGE is Offline

SPB: Parameter Update

SPB: SPA Comm Sync

SPB: SPA Heartbeat

SPB: SPA is Offline

SPB: SPC Comm Sync

Description

Software History Revision 219

SPB reports the car encountered the DETS switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

SPB reports the car encountered the DETS switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at construction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

SPB reports the car was travelling faster than 95% of contract speed upon encountering the Down Emergency Terminal Switch. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at construction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation.

The car has exceeded inspection speed. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

Correction:

1. Check setting: CONFIG02/System Control Parameters/Inspection

Overspeed.

SPB has detected loss of communication with LS-EDGE.

Correction:

1. Check CAN1 and CAN2 connections on SCE-CPU.

2. Check connections on LS-EDGE.

Parameters are being updated. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. If in error, cycle power to the controller.

Informational. SPB has established communication with SPA.

SPB cannot detect SPA heartbeat signal. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Reset SPA (RSTA on SCE-CPU).

2. If problem does not clear, cycle system power.

Safety processor B reports safety processor A is not communicating. The car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and the doors will not be allowed to move. May occur subsequent to an unsuccessful parameter update. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPA sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press SCE-CPU board RSTA button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

Informational. SPB has established contact with SPC.

2-84 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

SPB: SPC is Offline

SPB: UETS Position High

SPB: UETS Position Low

SPB: UETS Speed High

SPC Started Up

SPC: 3HN Comm Loss

SPC: CAN 3 Comm Loss

SPC: CAN Comm Loss

Description

Software History Revision 219

Safety processor B reports safety processor C is not communicating. The car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and the doors will not be allowed to move. May occur subsequent to an unsuccessful parameter update. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPC sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press SCE-CPU board RSTC button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

SPB reports the car encountered the Up Emergency Terminal Switch at a position higher than the position learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

SPB reports the car encountered the Up Emergency Terminal Switch at a position lower than the position learned during the hoistway learn operation.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

SPB reports the car was travelling faster than the learned speed plus the delta upon encountering the Up Emergency Terminal Speed switch. Car will perform an emergency stop, then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Relearn limit switches (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

SPC reports it has booted up. Cannot be bypassed.

Safety processor C is reporting that serial hall call communications have been lost. The system will begin emergency dispatch operation. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check power to hall call bus (fuse F24HWY on SCE-UPD board).

Safety processor C is reporting CAN 3 (Serial Hall Call) communications have been lost. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. Check CAN connections for hall call bus (CANH3/CANL3) on SCE-CPU.

Safety processor C is reporting CAN communications have been lost.

Cannot be bypassed.

2-85

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Stuck Car Call

Event

SPC: SPA is Offline

SPC: SPB is Offline

Stuck Door Zone Fault

Stuck Down Hall Call

Stuck Leveling Fault

Stuck Photo Eye

Description

Software History Revision 219

Safety processor C reports that Safety Processor A is not communicating.

Car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and doors will not be allowed to move. May occur subsequent to an unsuccessful parameter update. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPA sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press SCE-CPU board RSTA button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

Safety processor C reports that Safety Processor B is not communicating.

Car will perform an emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled and doors will not be allowed to move. May occur subsequent to an unsuccessful parameter update. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- SPB sequence numbers offline

Correction:

1. Press the SCE-CPU board RSTB button.

2. If the processor resets, monitor activity for recurrence.

A timer (10 seconds) limits the amount of time a car will be held at a floor due to a defective or stuck car call. When the timer expires, call demand at another floor will cause the defective call to be ignored and the car will continue to provide service. Fault-bypassed in Construction/

Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Car Flags, Stuck Car Call Timer Front = Timer Elapsed

Correction:

1. Verify car call input not continuously activated. (See Register Calls screen and/or programmed inputs.)

Door zone did not go low during run. Fault-bypassed in Construction/

Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify activity.

2. Check wiring.

3. Verify DZ flag activity at Utilities/Landing System Utilities/Landing

System View to see that DZ turns off when car is between floors.

System has detected a sticking down hall call button.

Leveling signal did not transition low at end of run. ULM and DLM are both active. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify, UTILS/Landing System View/ULMF or DLMF.

2. Verify landing system function and wiring.

Photo eye input continuously active. If Bypass Stuck PHE (Config 01) is enabled, the controller will ignore the PHE and close the doors after the

Stuck PHE Timer elapses or when the Car Delayed timer expires, whichever comes first. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags = Stuck Photo Eye Timer Elapsed

- Door Flags, Photo Eye Bypassed and Photo Eye Failed are not true.

Correction:

1. Verify PHE status, System IO, Programmed Inputs.

2. If no PHE is installed, PHE input should not be programmed.

3. Verify function of PHE device.

2-86 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Stuck Safe Edge

Stuck Sensor (Edge)

Stuck Up Hall Call

Suspension Integrity

Terminal Switch Learn

Terminal Sync (Edge)

Test Mode

Traction Loss

Event

Top Deviation (Edge)

Description

Software History Revision 219

Safe edge input continuously active. If Bypass Stuck Safe Edge (Config

01) is enabled, the controller will ignore the SE and close the doors after the Stuck SE Timer elapses or when the Car Delayed timer expires, whichever comes first. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Door Flags, Stuck Safe Edge Timer = Elapsed

- Door Flags Safety Edge Bypassed and Safe Edge Failed are not true.

Correction:

1. Verify Safe Edge status, System IO/Programmed Inputs.

2. If no Safe Edge is installed, input should not be programmed.

3. Verify function of Safe Edge device.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. A leveling or terminal sensor is not changing state. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify the LED indicators (UTILS/LS View) show state changes while traversing door zones, ETS, or Terminal magnets.

2. Replace LS-EDGE-EL tape reader.

System has detected a sticking up hall call button.

With alternate suspension materials (belts, non-steel ropes, etc.), a sensor is required to monitor integrity of suspension means. Fault is triggered by an active input from that sensor. Car will stop at the next floor, cancel all calls, and cycle doors to allow passengers to exit, and shut down. Fault-bypassed in Construction. Manual reset required.

System Verifies:

- SMI input is configured.

- SMI input is low.

Correction:

1. If in error, check that an input is not mistakenly programmed for this function (System IO/Programmed Inputs, SMI input). If so, set to unused.

2. If valid, verify sensor and suspension integrity.

A terminal switch learn operation is in progress.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. Indicates that the landing system has lost position and is performing a terminal synch operation.

Fault-bypassed in Construction.

The controller is operating in Test Mode. This mode allows the car to be run at contract speed with door opening disabled to facilitate testing. Hall calls are not registered. Fault-bypassed in Construction/Inspection.

System Verifies:

- Mode of operation = Test

Correction:

1. If Test mode is not selected, check System IO/System Inputs, Test.

2. Verify Test/Pretest switch not in Test position.

Initiated by the LS-EDGE-EL landing system. LS-EDGE-EL encountered terminal magnets that do not match the learned positions. Faultbypassed in Construction/Inspection.

Correction:

1. Verify magnets for terminals have not been changed.

2. Relearn terminal magnet locations by performing a floor learn.

Landing system quadrature channel has been lost. Fault-bypassed in

Construction/Inspection.

2-87

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

UFE/PM Stuck Off

UFE/PM Stuck On

Unknown Fault

USB Drive Inserted

USB Drive Removed

USE/BR Stuck Off

USE/BR Stuck On

USL1 is Low

Event

USL1 Position High

USL1 Position Low

USL1 Speed High-Lower

USL1 Speed High-Upper

Description

Software History Revision 219

Up Fast Enable or Primary Motor contactor output is stuck off.

Correction:

1. Verify status of output.

Up Fast Enable or Primary Motor contactor output is stuck on.

Correction:

1. Verify status of output.

Generated by safety processor SPC. Appears only in the Event Log. SPC received an unidentified error code. May occur after unsuccessful software update. Cannot be bypassed.

Correction:

1. If after unsuccessful update, repeat update procedure.

Momentary message. A USB drive has been inserted into the port on the

SCE-CPU board.

Momentary message. A USB drive has been removed from the port on the SCE-CPU board.

The Up Slow Enable/Brake Contactor output is stuck off.

Correction:

1. Verify status of output.

The Up Slow Enable/Brake Contactor output is stuck on

Correction:

1. Verify status of output.

Informational. USL1 input is low.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify function of switch (if physical) and/or input.

The car encountered the USL1 switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Car encountered USL1 switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

Correction:

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed upon encountering the USL1 switch. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car was travelling faster than the learned speed plus the delta upon encountering the USL1 switch. The car will perform an emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to the terminal.

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

2-88 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Troubleshooting Reference

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

USL1/USL2 Mismatch

USL2 Position High

USL2 Position Low

USL2 Speed High-Lower

USL2 Speed High-Upper

USLx and DSLx are Low

Description

Software History Revision 219

USL1 and USL2 are in different states. The car will relevel into the next floor and remove itself from service.

Correction:

1. Verify switch status and connections.

The car encountered the USL2 switch at a position higher than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

The car encountered the USL2 switch at a position lower than that learned during the hoistway learn operation. The car will perform an emergency slowdown then proceed at correction speed to the landing.

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Car travelling faster than learned speed upon encountering USL2 switch.

Car performs emergency slowdown then proceeds at correction speed to landing

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Car travelling faster than learned speed plus delta upon encountering

USL2 switch. Car will perform emergency stop then proceed at correction speed to terminal.

1. Verify position of switch (software or physical).

2. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Named Up and Down Slow Limit switches low. Car performs emergency stop and is not allowed to move. All calls canceled. If in a door zone doors will cycle to allow passenger exit. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Limit inputs USL and DSL low.

- 2 bus has power.

Correction:

1. Verify switches mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify input connections.

3. View System IO/System Inputs, USL and DSL for correct status.

4. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

2-89

Configuration and Troubleshooting

Table 2.14 Touch Screen Event Listings

Event

UTL and DSLx are Low

UTL and DTL are Low

UTL is Low

Waiting for In-Car Sw

Warning: Flts Bypassed

Description

Software History Revision 219

Up Terminal Limit switch and named Down Slow Limit both low (open). If moving up, car will perform emergency stop. If moving down, car will drop high speed, locate a floor, and cycle doors to allow passengers to exit. Fault-bypassed in Construction.

System Verifies:

- Limit inputs UTL and DSL low.

- 2 bus has power.

Correction:

1. Verify switches mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify input connections.

3. View System IO/System Inputs, UTL and DSL for correct status.

4. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Up and Down Terminal Limit switches are both low (open). Car will perform emergency stop and will not be allowed to move. All calls will be canceled. If in a door zone, doors will be cycled to allow passengers to exit. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- Limit inputs UTL and DTL low.

- 2 bus has power.

Correction:

1. Verify switches mechanically and electrically.

2. Verify input connections.

3. View System IO/System Inputs, UTL and DTL for correct status.

4. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Up Terminal Limit switch has opened. If moving up, the car will perform an emergency stop. This switch should not open unless the car overshoots the terminal and opens the switch. The open switch prevents further movement towards the terminal. Cannot be bypassed.

System Verifies:

- 2 bus has power.

- UTL input is low.

- USL (Up Slow Limit) input is low.

Correction:

1. If in error, verify switches and connections mechanically and electrically.

2. Check the state of the System IO/System Inputs/UTL, against the state of the switch (touchscreen landing system flags).

3. Repeat learn operation (Utils/Landing System Utilities/Terminal Switch

Learn).

Informational. The car is at a recall floor with doors open awaiting activation of the current mode of operation in-car switch.

FAULTS ARE BEING BYPASSED. The fault bypass jumper on the SCE-CPU board is in the BYPASS position and Utilities/Fault Bypass is enabled for the active mode of operation (UTILS/Construct and Bypass Faults).

2-90 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Event Log Viewing

Event Log Viewing

Messages helpful to operational diagnostics are stored in an event log on the micro SD card plugged in to the SCE-CPU board. The event log may be viewed through the on-board touch screen or the web interface.

The event files are in .csv (comma separated values) format. These files may be read as a continuous text file in applications like Notepad or Wordpad or in a table format when opened using

Microsoft Word or Excel.

In instances when you are working with MCE Technical Support, log files may be easily attached to an email and sent to the MCE Technician for examination.

Touch Screen Log Access

1. Scroll down the touch screen to the System Diag tab.

2. Select Event Log.

Some events provide both ON and OFF state messages. In these instances, there will be an asterisk (*) at the end of the fault text to let you know that a second,

OFF state, event (gray) will be in the log.

Event log entries are in color:

Red: Error. Will cause an “Excessive” faults condition if too many occur in a 24 hour period.

Yellow: Fault

Blue: Informational

Gray: Inactive

Position in list #

Fault Number - Fault Code

Filter selection

Filtering

A button at the bottom center of the screen allows you to filter the event display.

PC Log Access

Through a PC, open the web browser and enter the IP address of the controller in the URL box.

When contact with the controller is established, a tabbed Element Series interface will appear.

1. Click on the Faults tab.

2. A list of any active faults will appear, followed by the system Event Log.

2-91

Configuration and Troubleshooting

2-92 Manual # 42-02-2P26

Maintenance Plan Information

In this section

This section provides information to help you maintain the Element installation and to incorporate Element into your Maintenance Control Plan.

• 8.6.1.2.2

Where a defective part directly affecting the safety of the operation is identified, the equipment shall be taken out of service until the defective part has been adjusted, repaired, or replaced.

• Controller

page 3-2

• SmarTraq Door Operator page 3-5

• HAPS Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply

page 3-10

• Traction Auxiliary Power Supply,

page 3-12

Maintenance Intervals

The maintenance intervals provided here can be affected by actual site conditions. Consider:

• equipment age, condition, and accumulated wear

• design and inherent quality of the equipment

• usage

• environmental conditions

• improved technology

• the manufacturer’s recommendations for any SIL rated devices or circuits

3-1

Maintenance Plan Information

Controller

Monthly

Controller General

• 8.6.1.6.3

• Clean the exterior and interior of the controller as necessary using a shop vacuum with appropriate attachments and a soft dry cloth.

• Visually inspect electrical and mechanical connections. Correct if necessary.

• Review the controller event log for recurring faults indicative of a subsystem problem, i.e., door systems, landing systems, car and hall calls, etc.

• Listen for bearing noise from drive cooling fan (if present). Clean/repair/replace as required.

Air Conditioned Cabinets

• Inspect and clean drain tubes.

• Visually inspect filters. Clean/replace as required.

Load Weighers

MCE Isolated Platform

• With an empty car, verify voltage between LW+ and LW- within 0.3 to 1.0 VDC.

• Adjust per controller manual or installation instruction if required.

Lead/Acid Batteries

Wet cell, lead/acid batteries may be used to supply power to rescue or other power-loss backup systems. Replace battery as necessary, generally every three to five years.

• Check connections for corrosion. Remove, clean, and replace as necessary.

• Visually inspect battery bin for signs of acid leakage. If leakage has occurred, remove battery; clean and/or refinish bin; replace battery.

• Using a voltmeter, verify battery voltage is not below rated output.

Car

• 8.6.4.16 Stopping Accuracy

• Verify car stops without releveling, within +/- 0.25 inches of level at all floors in both up and down directions where applicable.

3-2 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Controller

Every Six Months

Controller General

• Monthly routine

• Clean and inspect drive cooling fan. Verify proper operation.

• If available, check drive fault log. Troubleshoot per drive manual.

• Verify connection integrity on drives, starters, line contactors, and discrete relays.

• While the car is operating, check for “flashing” or buzzing from contactors or discrete relays. Replace defective components.

Air Conditioned Cabinets

• Monthly routine

• Replace filters.

Load Weighers

• Monthly routine

• EMCO rope tension weigher: Perform zero calibration per controller manual.

• K-Tech: Verify load adjustments per controller manual.

Lead/Acid Batteries

• Monthly routine

Board-mounted Batteries

These batteries are used to maintain memory over power shutdown.

• Measure voltage with controller power off. See manual for specific replacement recommendation. Generally 90% or less of rated voltage (

page 2-41 ).

Car

• Monthly routine

Landing System

• Check mounting integrity and alignment.

• Check for wear on sensor head tape guides. Replace if needed.

• Visually inspect sensors. Clean if needed.

• Inspect tape. Clean with soft, lint-free cloth.

Power Supplies

• Check supply voltages at supply or at board testpoints. Adjust or replace if needed.

Brake

• Verify brake pick and hold voltage.

• Verify pick, running clearance, and drop.

• Verify minimum 95% contact between shoe and braking surface when dropped.

• Verify brake will hold 125% of rated load.

• Verify brake (position monitor) switch if present.

3-3

Maintenance Plan Information

Yearly

Controller General

• 6 month routine as previously stated

• Verify screw termination integrity. PC terminals - 7 inch pounds.

• Verify integrity of power, isolation transformer, and filter assembly connections.

• Fuses: Verify cleanliness and physical integrity. Check for voltage drop across fuse greater than 1.0 V (AC or DC) - replace if present. MCE fuse locations are labeled - always replace with the designated type and value.

Air Conditioned Cabinets

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Load Weighers

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Lead/Acid Batteries

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Board-mounted Batteries

These batteries are used to maintain memory over power shutdown.

• Measure voltage with controller power off. See manual for specific replacement recommendation. Generally 90% or less of rated voltage (

page 2-41 ).

Car

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Landing System

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Power Supplies

• 6 month routine as previously stated

Brake

• 6 month routine as previously stated

3-4 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

SmarTraq Door Operator

SmarTraq Door Operator

• Check and adjust as needed:

• Motor V-belt: Mid-way between the pulleys, the belt should deflect 1/2-inch (13mm) under moderate pressure. The belt should not slip. Replace if cracked or worn.

• Open and close stop rollers: Check for flat spots. Rotate or replace as needed.

• Chain tension: Adjust tension roller to remove slack if needed.

• Urethane dampening strips: Check urethane strips around chain pulley and sprocket.

Replace if broken. (These strips reduce operator noise.)

• Door linkage bearings: Oil or grease once a year.

• Clutch cable: Check tension. Adjust if undue slack.

• Door bumpers: Check for distortion or cracking. Replace if needed.

• Check that operator and motor mountings are tight and true.

• Clean, but do not lubricate chain. (Excess can drip down onto passengers.)

Door Closing Force

8.6.4.13.2 Refer to the following tables:

3-5

Maintenance Plan Information

Table 3.1 Center Parting, No Nudging

3-6 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Table 3.2 Center Parting, Nudging Provided

SmarTraq Door Operator

3-7

Maintenance Plan Information

Table 3.3 Side Slide, No Nudging

3-8 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Table 3.4 Side Slide, Nudging Provided

SmarTraq Door Operator

3-9

Maintenance Plan Information

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply

8.6.4.19.7, 8.6.4.20.5 Maintenance and Testing

Battery Maintenance

1. Check the batteries every 4 to 6 months. If a battery is not in good condition, have a qualified technician replace the batteries as soon as possible.

2. The batteries should be charged and discharged every 4 to 6 months during normal use.

Before charging, discharge the batteries to under-voltage. (Discharge can be accomplished using Test Mode as needed .

The charging time must be at least 24 hours.

3. If a battery needs to be replaced, replace all of the batteries in the unit according to the

instructions on page 3-11 .

Danger

Working with batteries exposes you to possible electrical shock and burns. Take proper precaution whenever handling batteries. When replacing batteries, use the same type (MCE part number 30-05-0026). Proper Disposal of batteries is required. Refer to your local codes for disposal instructions.

Battery Voltage No Load Test

1. Set switch SW1 to the OFF (middle) position.

2. Open the main disconnect.

3. Measure the DC voltage between terminals J4 (+) and J6 (-) on the HAPS main board using a DC multimeter.

4. Measured voltage should be 26VDC or greater for fully charged batteries. If batteries are not fully charged, this voltage will be less than 26VDC.

Battery Voltage Load Test

1. Make sure batteries are fully charged (indicator FLC is ON).

2. Connect multimeter across terminals J4 (+) and J6 (-) on HAPS main board.

3. Move the elevator to the top landing.

4. Hold switch SW1 in the TEST (bottom) position. HAPS will start backup operation.

5. Check the battery voltage reading on the multimeter while the elevator is running in backup operation.

6. If battery voltage is dropping quickly and goes below 19.5VDC, the batteries need to be replaced.

Battery Charger Circuit Test

If batteries are not fully charged after HAPS has been in normal operation for longer than 12 hours, verify the battery charging circuit is functioning properly.

1. Set switch SW1 to the OFF (middle) position.

2. Open the main disconnect.

3. Ensure that all battery wires are properly connected.

4. Check fuse F4 on the HAPS main board.

3-10 Manual # 42-02-2P26

element TM Series

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply

5. Measure DC voltage between terminals J4 (+) and J6 (-) using a DC multimeter. Record the measured voltage.

6. Turn ON power by closing the main disconnect.

7. Make sure the CHG indicator is blinking.

8. Measure DC voltage between terminals J4 (+) and J6 (-) using a DC multimeter. The value should be larger than the previously recorded voltage.

9. If the battery charging circuit is operating correctly, replace the batteries. See Battery

Replacement Procedure below.

Battery Replacement

1. On the HAPS main board, set switch SW1 in the OFF (center) position.

2. Open the main disconnect.

3. Remove the white wire from negative ( - ) terminal(s) J6 (and J7). Insulate the wire end to prevent contact/shorting to other components.

4. Unscrew the 2 screws to the right of the HAPS main control board and swing open the cover to expose the batteries. Note that no wires need to be disconnected in order to access the batteries under the HAPS main control board.

5. Carefully disconnect the old batteries from the slip connectors. Remove the batteries taking care to protect the poles from shorting.

6. Replace the batteries ensuring that cables are connected to the correct poles.

7. Close the cover and re-install the screws.

8. Reconnect white wire(s) to negative ( - ) terminal(s) J6 (and J7).

Caution

When connecting, a spark will occur. This is normal.

9. Restore commercial power.

10. Return HAPS switch SW1 to the ON (top) position. The HAPS unit is now able to enter battery back-up operation if commercial power is lost.

3-11

Maintenance Plan Information

TAPS, Traction Auxiliary Power Supply

Functional Test

Mainline Disconnect Verification:

This verifies that the fourth pole of the main line disconnect or micro switch is functional when power is intentionally shut off at the main line disconnect.

1. Verify that BS1 and BS2 are connected to the fourth pole of the main line disconnect.

2. Set the AC/TAPS DISCONNECT switch to the ON position.

3. Shut off power at the main line disconnect.

4. Verify that the car is not energized and remains stopped.

TAPS and Controller Operation Verification:

1. Ensure the main line disconnect is in the ON position.

2. Ensure the AC/TAPS DISCONNECT switch is in the ON position.

3. Ensure the TAPS BYPASS switch is in the NORMAL position.

4. Verify the NORMAL POWER indicator is on.

5. With empty car, move the elevator on inspection slightly above the leveling zone of the floor with the longest floor distance moving in the up direction.

6. Push and hold the test button until TAPS is in backup power mode. Verify the BACKUP

POWER indicator is on.

7. Quickly put the elevator back to normal operation.

8. The elevator should begin to move in the up direction until it reaches the floor above.

Once the elevator reaches the floor, it shall cycle the door.

9. If TAPS shuts down before the elevator completes the rescue operation due to the timer set in parameter F1-1 “Backup Power Run Time,” extend the timer accordingly and perform the test again.

10. If TAPS shuts down before the elevator completes the rescue operation due to battery voltage drop below F1-5 (error code E-04), let the TAPS charge for 8 hours before performing this test again.

11. If input P3 “Rescue Operation Complete” is used, TAPS shall shut down once the rescue operation is complete and input P3 is energized. This will immediately cancel the parameter F1-1 “Backup Power Run Time.” If the command is not issued to the TAPS unit, please check wiring and controller output.

12. If input P2 “Restart Backup Power Operation” is used, verify by pushing the DOB button in the COP to validate proper wiring and operation. This can be done once TAPS has been shut down by either P3 input or parameter F1-1 “Backup Run Time” having elapsed. TAPS shall then restart when the DOB is pressed and will operate until either

P3 is activated or parameter F1-1 has expired.

13. If input P1 “Remote Backup Power Operation” is used, verify correct operation by triggering this input from the appropriate controller output or the source it is wired to. To do this, TAPS shall be on commercial power operation and “Normal Power” indicator shall be lighted. When the P1 input is triggered and held for the duration defined by F1-

9 “Commercial Power Loss Detection” (factory default is 2 seconds), TAPS shall proceed to “BACK UP” power operation and indicator BACKUP POWER shall light. TAPS shall then operate until cancelled by either input P3 “Rescue operation Complete” or by parameter F1-1 “Backup Power Run Time” having elapsed. Note that shut down may also be caused by drained/discharged batteries, dead batteries, or an inoperative UPS unit.

3-12 Manual # 42-02-2P26

Index

Numerics

1 2-45

2 2-48, 2-50

2 BUS 2-23

2 bus 2-48

2 Bus is Low 2-53

2 STOP FLG 2-23

2 stop operation 2-23

2010 ADA 1-5

24CTP 2-50

24FS 2-50

24HWY 2-50

24V power monitor 2-46

24VDC 2-46, 2-50, 2-51

2LS 2-48, 2-50

2LS BUS 2-23

2MV 2-48, 2-51

2MV BUS 2-23

2MV Bus is Low 2-53

A

A-/SPD1 2-45

A+/SPD0 2-45

ABD 2-23, 2-45

ABU 2-23, 2-45

Acceleration 2-12

Access Enable 2-45

Active Faults 1-14, 2-19, 2-32

Actual direction display 1-13

ADA 2-23

ADA Car Timer 2-8

ADA Hall Timer 2-8

Address Diagnostics 2-20

Adjusting floor heights 2-10

AGND 2-49

Air Conditioned Cabinets 3-2

ALIVE 2-21

Alive Input Low 2-53

Alternate Acceleration 2-13

Alternate Deceleration 2-13

Alternate Fire Recall Floor 2-5

Alternate Roll Jerk 2-13

Alternate Speed 2-15

Alternate Start Jerk 2-13

Alternate Stop Jerk 2-13

Altitude 1-5

Analog ground 2-49

Anti-Nuisance 1-6

APS 2-24

APS DONE 2-22

APS FAIL 2-21

APS ON 2-21

APS REVD 2-21

Architecture 1-17

ARROW DN 2-22

ARROW UP 2-22

Ascending Car Overspeed Test 1-55

Ascending Car Overspeed Test 1-55

ATD 2-24, 2-45

ATU 2-24, 2-45

Auto Emerg Slew Rate 2-16

Auto Norm Slew Rate 2-16

Auto Slew Filter 2-16

Automatic Fault Bypass 1-6, 2-18

Automatic Mode 2-42

Automatic modes 1-8

Aux CPI IO’s 2-19

Aux Power

Done 2-53

Fail 2-53

Fire I 2-53

Fire II 2-53

Recall 2-54

Auxiliary contactor 2-79

Auxiliary power supply 2-21

B

B- 2-45

B+ 2-45

Backup (Alternate) Speed 2-15

Backup Current Settings 1-14, 2-18, 2-29

Batteries 3-2

Battery 2-41, 3-3, 3-4

Battery Backed RAM 2-54

BBRAM Read Error 2-54

BBRAM Write Error 2-54

Blue event text = informational 2-19

Bootload Switches On 2-54

Bottom Access Distance 2-10

Bottom Access, DOWN 2-45

Index-1

Bottom Access, UP 2-45

Bottom Deviation (Edge) 2-54

Bottom Floor 2-5

BP Construction 2-54

BP CP Construction 2-54

BP CP Inspection 2-54

BP CT Construction 2-55

BP CT Inspection 2-55

BP Inspection 2-55

BR 2-48

BR Failed to Turn Off 2-55

BR Failed to Turn On 2-55

Brake Contact Monitor 2-46

Brake contactor 2-46

Brake Contactor power 2-48

Brake Contactor Proofing Test 1-55

Brake Coordination 1-45

brake current 2-37

Brake Drop Delay 2-16

Brake enable DC 2-46

Brake fault 2-46

Brake Faults 1-25

brake hold 2-37

Brake Output Monitor 2-77

brake pick 2-37

Brake pick control 2-46

Brake Pick Sw Closed 2-55

Brake Pick Sw Flaky 2-55

Brake Pick Sw Open 2-55

Brake Pick/Hold Voltages 1-25

BRAKE SW 2-21, 2-24

BRE signal 2-24

BRE.B 2-24

BRE.P 2-24

BREDC 2-24, 2-46

BRFLT 2-24, 2-46

BRFLT is On 2-55

BRK FLT LED 1-25

BROM 2-24, 2-46

BRP 2-24, 2-46

BRP Failed to Turn Off 2-55

BRP Failed to Turn On 2-56

BRPK 2-24, 2-46

Building Security 1-14, 2-17

Building Setup 2-5

Building Setup in-car inspection option 2-45

BUS 1-12

Bus voltage testpoints 2-31

BYP 2-24

Bypass EP Sequencing 2-17

bypass faults 2-42

bypass faults on construction mode 1-22

Bypass PHE 2-6

Bypass SE 2-6

Bypass Stuck DOB 2-6

Index-2 Manual # 42-02-2P26

C

Call Registration 2-18

CAN 2-45, 2-46

CAN Bus 1-39

CAN bus data 2-20

CAN Bus termination 1-44

CAN Bus Viewer 2-20

Can Bus Viewer 1-16

CAN Termination 1-42

Capture Door 2-6

Capture Floor 2-6

Capture Mode 2-56

Car 2 Floor ‘nn’ Opening 2-20

Car 2 Floor Heights 2-20

Car and Hall call registration 2-18

car call button 2-7

CAR CALL buttons 2-35

Car Call Canceled Due To 2-20, 2-33

Car Call Timer 2-8

CAR CALLS 1-12

Car Calls Disabled 2-56

Car Controller

installation of 1-20

CAR DELAY 2-22

Car Delayed 2-56

Car Delayed Door Closed 2-56

Car Delayed Door Open 2-56

Car Delayed Time 2-9

Car Delayed Timer 2-9

Car door bypass 2-41

CAR GONG 2-22

Car Hold 2-56

Car ID 2-5

Car Label 1-13, 2-5

CAR LANTDN 2-22, 2-24

CAR LANTUP 2-22, 2-24

Car motion animation 1-13

Car Oscillates at Contract Speed 1-52

Car Overshoots 1-52

Car Panel Inspection 2-5

Car Panel Inspection Inputs 2-5

Car Stop Sw Bypassed 2-56

Car Stop Sw On 2-56

Car Stop Sw on Re-Level 2-56

Car to Group Data 2-19

Car top inspection 2-45, 2-46

Car top inspection DOWN 2-46

Car top inspection UP 2-46

Car/cwt buffer 1-57

Car/cwt safety 1-56

Car/Hoistway Door Bypass switches 2-54

Cars to Run on EP 2-17

Cartop box power control 2-46

Cartop Construct/Bypass 2-57

Cartop Construction 2-57

Cartop Insp/Bypass 2-57

CC 2-24

CC Enable Active Off 2-17

CC ENBL1-6 2-21

CC REG 2-22

CC SECURED 2-22

CC24V 1-41, 2-35

CCB 2-24

CCB Cancels LOT 2-7

CCB Shortens CCT 2-7

CCB Shortens HCT 2-7

CCC 2-24

CCC Behind Car 2-6

CCC Reversal 2-6

CCF 2-24

CCT 2-24

CDATA 2-45

CDB 2-24

CDB Switch Fault 2-57

CDBO 2-24

CDBOB 2-24

CE fixture self-test 2-43

CE MODE 2-42

Cell Battery Volts Low 2-57

Certified ground 2-31

CFG Err

2-Stop Config 2-57

Car Panel Insp 2-57

Controller Type 2-57

Hoist Access 2-58

Invalid Floor 2-58

Landing System 2-58

CGED 2-24

CGEU 2-24

Close Limit Time 2-8

CMC 2-24

COC 2-24

COM 1-12, 2-24

Commercial Power Loss 2-58

Compliance Test Active 2-58

COMPLIANCE TESTING 1-56

CONFIG 2-24, 2-46

Config 03 1-14

Config Storage 2-58

CONFIG01, Configure Spare Inputs 2-7

Construction & Faults Bypass 1-14, 2-18

Construction Fault Bypass 1-5, 2-18

Construction Invalid 2-58

Construction Mode 2-42

Construction mode 1-8

Construction Mode Car Panel 2-58

Construction operation 2-18

Contract Overspeed 2-15

Contract overspeed 1-58

Contract Ovrspd 2-58

Contract Speed 1-23, 1-24, 1-45, 2-15

Controller maintenance 3-2

Controller Type 2-5

controller will not answer hall calls 1-60

COP 2-24

Copying Files to USB 2-58

Correct Speed 2-15

COS 2-24

COS Timer 2-9

countdown timer 2-18

Counterweight Position 2-10

CP 2-24

CP Construction 2-58

CP DOWN 2-24

CP ENABLE 2-24

CP Ins Stuck Input 2-58

CP Ins Stuck Input Flt 2-59

CP UP 2-24

CPI Addresses 1-43

CPI board address 2-36

CPI CAN baud rate 1-43

CPI-2 board CAN Baud rate 2-36

CPI-2 DIP switch 2-36

CPI-2 Jumpers 2-36

CPIx is Offline 2-59

CPU 1-12, 2-24

CPU Bus Communication 2-20

CPU DIP Switches 2-43

2-position, SW5 2-43

8-position, S2 2-43

CPU, BUS, COM Status 2-33

CSC 2-24

CT 2-24

CT Construction 2-59

CT Ins Stuck Input 2-59

CT Ins Stuck Input Flt 2-59

CT Inspection 2-57

CTEN 2-24, 2-45

CTPR 2-24, 2-46, 2-50

CTST 2-24

CWI 2-24

Cycle Doors 2-17

Cycle Test - “nnn” 2-59

Cycle Test M2L 2-59

Cycle Test MSAF High 2-59

CYCTST 2-24

D

Danger Deceleration 2-14

Danger Roll Jerk 2-13

Danger Start Jerk 2-13

Danger Stop Jerk 2-13

Date and Time 1-13, 1-14, 2-18

DCB 2-21, 2-24

DCB Cancels HCT 2-6

DCB Short CCTR 2-6

DCB Short HCTNCE 2-6, 2-7

DCB Shortens LOT 2-6

DCF 2-22, 2-25, 2-49

DCL 2-21, 2-25

DCOM 2-46, 2-49

Dead Zone Distance 2-15

Deceleration 2-13

Default Gateway 2-18

DETS 2-25, 2-48

DETS Delta Distance 2-11

DETS Delta Speed 2-11

DETS Distance 2-11

DETS Speed 2-11

DETS switch 2-11

Index-3

DFE/EB1 2-48

DFE/EB1 Stuck Off 2-60

DFE/EB1 Stuck On 2-60

DFLT 2-25, 2-46

DFLT is On 2-60

DFLT Off 2-60

DGND 2-49

DHOLD END 2-22

DHOLD ON 2-22

Diagnostics Tree 1-14, 2-19

Dir Pref DLK 2-6 direction preference 2-6

Disp ID

nn 1-13

Dispatch Load 2-60

Dispatcher 1-13, 2-17

Dispatcher Comm Loss 2-60

DL01 2-50

DL02 2-50

DLAB 2-25, 2-49

DLAB Open-Running 2-60

DLABB 2-25

DLAT 2-25, 2-49

DLAT Open-Running 2-60

DLATB 2-25

DLK 2-25

DLM 2-21, 2-25

DLMS 2-25, 2-49

DLMS Open-Running 2-61

DLMSB 2-25

DLN 2-25

DOB 2-21, 2-25

DOB Bypass 2-61

DOB Bypass Timer 2-9

DOB Fail 2-61

DOF 2-22, 2-25, 2-49

DOL 2-21, 2-25

DOL - DPM Fault 2-62

DOL Low - DCL Low 2-61

DOL Low - DLAB High 2-61

DOL Low - DLAT High 2-61

DOL Low - DLMS High 2-61

DOL Low - DPM High 2-62

DOL Low - GS High 2-62

Door Bypass 2-41

Door Bypass Construc 2-62

Door Bypass Inspection 2-62

Door Bypass switches 1-19

Door Close 2-20

Door Close Button 2-6

Door Close Due To 2-33

Door Close Fail ’n’ 2-62

Door Close Fault 2-8, 2-62

Door Close Function 2-49

Door Closing Force 3-5

Door Contact Fault 2-7

Door Contact FLT Latch option 2-61

Door Control 1-14, 2-19, 2-32

Door debounce 2-8

Door Dwell Times 1-15, 2-33

Index-4 Manual # 42-02-2P26

Door Fault Shutdown 2-62

Door Faults Information 2-60

DOOR HOLD 2-21

Door Hold 2-62

Door Hold Timer 2-9

Door Interlock Timer 2-8

Door Lock Bottom string 2-49

Door Lock Middle String input 2-49

Door Lock Status 1-13

Door lock string 2-46

Door Lock Top string input 2-49

Door Open 2-20

door open button 2-9

Door Open Due To 2-33

Door Open Fail 2-8

Door Open Fail ’n’ 2-63

Door Open Fault 2-8, 2-63

Door Open Function 2-7, 2-49

Door operator 1-44

door operator 2-50

Door Position Monitor switch 1-44

Door Status 1-13

Door Unintended Motion 2-63

Door Zone, input 2-45

Doors Closed Not Locked 2-63

Double Ding Down 2-6

Down Emergency Terminal Switch 2-11

Down Emergency Terminal Switch input 2-48

Down Fast Enable output 2-48

Down Slow Enable output 2-48

Down Slow Limit 1 input 2-48

Down Slow Limit 2 input 2-48

Down Terminal Limit input 2-48

Down Terminal Limit switch 2-66

DPM 1-44, 2-21, 2-25

DPM Low - DLK High 2-63

DPM Open-Running 2-63

DPS- 2-46

DPS+ 2-46

DRDO 2-46

DRDY 2-25, 2-46

DRDY is Off 2-63

DRE 2-25, 2-46

DREB 2-25

Drive Disable Delay 2-16

Drive On input 2-64

drive response 1-47

Drive RX Communication 2-64

Drive RX Message 2-64

Drive TX Communication 2-64

Drive TX Message 2-64

Drive Type 2-16

DRO 2-25

DRO Failed to Turn Off 2-64

DRO Failed to Turn On 2-64

DSE/EB2 2-48

DSE/EB2 Stuck Off 2-64

DSE/EB2 Stuck On 2-64

DSL 2-25

DSL1 2-48

DSL1 Delta Distance 2-14

DSL1 Delta-H Speed 2-14

DSL1 Delta-L Speed 2-14

DSL1 Distance

2-14

DSL1 Position High 2-64

DSL1 Position Low 2-64

DSL1 Speed 2-14

DSL1 Speed High-Lower 2-64

DSL1 Speed High-Upper 2-65

DSL1 switch 2-65

DSL2 2-48

DSL2 Delta Distance 2-11

DSL2 Delta-H Speed 2-11

DSL2 Delta-L Speed 2-10

DSL2 Distance 2-11

DSL2 Position High 2-65

DSL2 Position Low 2-65

DSL2 Speed 2-10

DSL2 Speed High-Lower 2-65

DSL2 Speed High-Upper 2-65

DSL2 switch 2-65

DTL 2-25, 2-48

DTL and USLx Are Low 2-65

DTL Switch is Open 2-66

Duplex 1-5

duplex installation 2-42

duplex operation 1-53

Duplicate Car ID 2-66

Duplicate Dispatcher 2-66

DZ 2-25, 2-45

DZF Output Fault 2-66

E

Earthquake counterweight derail 2-21

Earthquake Normal Mode 2-7

After Delay 2-7

Fire Only 2-7

None 2-7

Earthquake Operation 1-6, 2-67

Earthquake Recall 2-67

Earthquake Reset 2-41

Earthquake Run 2-67

Earthquake seismic sensor 2-21

Earthquake sensor input 2-45

Earthquake Shutdown 2-67

Earthquake Speed 2-15

EB 2-25

EB Cycle Test Fault 2-67

EB1 2-48

EB12 2-48

EB1B 2-25

EB2 2-48

EB2A 2-25

EB2BP 2-25

EB3 2-48

EB4 2-48

EB4A 2-25

E-Brake Dropped 2-66

E-Brake Failed to Drop 2-66

E-Brake Failed to Pick 2-66

E-Brake Unexpected Drop 2-66

EF GONG 2-22

Egress Floor 2-5

Electrical 1-5

Electrical governor 1-57

Electrical Noise 1-52

Electrostatic Discharge 1-38

Elevator Features 2-6, 2-7

EMDISP 2-21, 2-25

EMDISPOV 2-21

Emerg Pwr & Earthquake 1-15

emergency brake 2-63, 2-71

Emergency Brake Type 2-16

Emergency Dispatch 2-67

Emergency Operation 1-6

Emergency Power 1-14, 2-17

Emergency power ON 2-23

Emergency power recall 2-22

Emergency Power Type 2-17

Emergency Power Type 2 2-20

Emergency Pwr & EQ 2-19

emergency stop 2-67

Emissions 1-5

EMS 2-25

EMS Floor 2-5

EMS In Car 2-67

EMS Recall 2-67

EMSC BUZZR 2-22

EMSC LIGHT 2-22

EMSC SW 2-21

EMSH LIGHT 2-22

EMSH SW 2-21

EN12016 1-5

Enable DOB on Security 2-17

Enclosure Installation 1-20

EP AUTO 2-21

EP CARDONE 2-22

EP Comm/Config Shutdown 2-67

EP Door Operation 2-17

EP LIGHT 2-22

EP LOBBY 2-23

EP MANUAL 2-21

EP ON 2-23

EP Recall 2-68

EP Recall Done 2-68

EP Recall Fail 2-68

EP Recall Floor 2-17

EP Recall ISV 2-68

EP Recall Next Floor 2-68

EP Recall Timeout 2-17

EP Run 2-68

EP SELECT 2-23

EP Shutdown 2-68

EP1 2-23

EP1 RECAL 2-23

EP2 ON 2-23

EP2 RUN 2-23

EPI 2-21

EPI C 2-21

Index-5

EQ 2-25

EQ BUZZER 2-23

EQ CWT 2-21, 2-25, 2-68

EQ Emergency Stop 2-68

EQ LIGHT 2-23

EQ Move 2-69

EQ RST 1-19

EQ SS 2-21, 2-68

EQI 2-25

EQR 2-25

ESC 2-25, 2-48, 2-69

ESC Input Low 2-69

ESCTO.B 2-25

ESD 1-38

ETH 2-25

Ethernet 2-46

Ethernet Error 2-69

ETS overspeed 1-58, 1-59

ETSL overspeed 1-59

ETSL Speed High 2-69

Event filter 2-91

Event Log 1-14, 2-19, 2-30, 2-32

Event Log Cleared 2-69

Event log colors 2-19

Event Log Write Fail 2-69

Event text color 2-19

Event troubleshooting 2-52

Events

Blue 2-91

Filtering 2-91

Gray 2-91

Red 2-91

Yellow 2-91

Excessive Faults 2-55, 2-69

Exit button 2-2

Export Current Settings to USB Drive 1-14

Export Events 2-18, 2-30

Export Events to USB Drive 1-14

Export Parameters 2-18

F

F2 2-31, 2-51

F24CTP 2-31, 2-51

F24FS 2-31, 2-51

F24HWY 2-31, 2-51

F24VDC 2-31, 2-51

F2MV 2-31, 2-51

Factory Defaults 2-18

FAN 2-50

FAN LIGHT 2-23

Fan/Light power control 2-46

FAULT 1-12, 1-19

Fault Bypass jumper 2-18

fault bypass mode 2-71

Fault Reset 2-41

FAULTS BYPASS 1-6

FB 2-25

FDL01 2-51

FDL02 2-51

FDLN1 2-31

Index-6 Manual # 42-02-2P26

FDLN2 2-31

FFLO 2-31, 2-51

FGOV 2-31, 2-51

File Transfer Menu 2-18

File Transfer. 2-29

Fire Bypassed 2-69

Fire Code 2-5

Fire Codes 1-5

Fire II 2-70

FIRE II CC 2-25

FIRE II HOLD 2-25

Fire II Hold 2-70

Fire II Recall 2-70

Fire Recall 2-70

FR1 On 2-70

FR1 On2 2-70

FR2 On 2-71

FRA 2-71

FRS 2-71

FRSA 2-71

FRSM 2-71

Fire Recall Alt 2-70

Fire Recall Done 2-70

Fire Service Phase II 1-8

Firefighter's CALL CANCEL 2-21

Firmware Update 2-71

FL1 2-31

Flags 1-15, 2-32

FLI 2-50

FLN 2-50

FLO 2-26, 2-50

FLO Timer 2-9

Flood Floor 2-5

Flood Operation 2-71

Flood Recall 2-71

Floor encoding input 2-22

Floor Height 2-10

Floor Label, per floor 2-5

Floor Offset 2-10

Floor Openings 2-5

Floor Unintended Motion 2-71

FLPC 2-26, 2-46, 2-50

FLPWR 2-26

FLR GONG 2-23, 2-26

FLT 2-26

FLT BYP 2-26

Flt Byp Jumper On 2-71

Flt Bypass JP

Time Out 2-71

FLT Bypass jumper 2-42

Following Error 2-16

FPM 2-26

FR 2-26

FR HAT 2-23, 2-26

FR ISV 2-23

FR RECALL 2-23

FR1 BUZR 2-23

FR1 BUZZER 2-26

FR1 DONE 2-23

FR1 LIGHT 2-23, 2-26

FR1 OFF 2-21, 2-26

FR1 ON 2-21, 2-26

FR1 ON2 2-21

FR1 RESET 2-21, 2-26

FR2 CANCEL 2-21

FR2 HOLD 2-21, 2-25

FR2 OFF 2-21, 2-26

FR2 ON 2-21, 2-26

FR2 STATUS 2-23

FRA 2-26, 2-45, 2-70

FRM 2-70

FRS 2-26, 2-45

FRSA 2-26, 2-45

FRSA OTHER 2-21

FRSM 2-26, 2-45

FRSM OTHER 2-21

FSO 2-23

Fuse types 2-31

FXL1 2-31, 2-51

FXL2 2-31, 2-51

G

GAL MOD 1-2

GAL MOVFR 1-2

gate switch 2-26

Gate Switch input 2-49

GOS 2-26

GOS1 2-51

GOS2 2-51

GOV 2-26, 2-48, 2-51

GOV Input Low 2-72

Governor overspeed 2-51 governor overspeed switch 2-51

GP PLD 2-26

GPI 2-49

GPO 2-49

Ground 2-31

Grounding 1-20

Group to Car Data 2-19

GS 2-26, 2-49

GS Open-Running 2-72

GSB 2-26

H

Hall Bus Inventory 2-20, 2-33

Hall Bus Test 2-20

Hall Call Canceled Due To 2-20, 2-33

Hall Call Inventory 2-33

Hall Call Loss 1-6

Hall Call Node Wiring 1-41

hall call statistics per hour 2-33

Hall Call Test 2-33

Hall Call Timer 2-8

HALL CALLS 1-12

Hall Calls 1-38

Hall Calls Bypassed 2-72

Hall Calls Disabled 2-72

HAPS 2-26, 2-51

HAPS maintenance & test 3-10

HC 2-26

HC CANCEL 2-21

HCF 2-26

HCT 2-26

HDATA 2-45

HDB 2-26

HDB Switch Fault 2-72

HDBO 2-26

HDBOB 2-26

High Speed 2-15

HIN1 2-26

HIN2 2-26

HLI

Heavy Load Input 1-44

Hoist Access Construct 2-72

Hoist Access Inspection 2-72

Hoistmotor Speed 2-15

Hoistway Access 2-5

Hoistway door bypass 2-41

Hoistway Door Bypass switches 2-54

Hoistway Setup 2-10

HOLD current 1-25

Home screen 2-2

Hourly Statistics 1-16, 2-20, 2-33

Hourly Stats Cleared 2-72

HOUT1 2-26

HOUT2 2-26

Humidity 1-5

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply 3-10

I

ICE-COP-2 1-18

ICEN 2-26

ICEN/IN1 2-5, 2-45

ICPD 2-26

ICPD/IN3 2-5, 2-45

ICPU 2-26

ICPU/IN2 2-5, 2-45

ICTD 2-26, 2-46

ICTU 2-26, 2-46

Idle Door Open 2-7

IGBT FLT LED 1-25

ignore DOB (Door Open Button) input 2-6 ignore PHE (Photo Eye) input 2-6 ignore SE(Safety Edge) input 2-6

Import & Apply Settings from USB Drive 1-14

Import Parameters 2-18

In car inspection 2-45

In car inspection DOWN 2-45

In car inspection enable 2-45

IN1H 2-26, 2-45

IN2H 2-27, 2-45

INA 2-27, 2-45

INAO 2-27

In-Car Construct/Bypass 2-72

In-car Construction 2-73

In-Car Insp/Bypass 2-73

In-Car Inspection 2-73

INCP 2-27, 2-45

INCT 2-27, 2-46

INCTD 2-27

Index-7

INCTO 2-27

INCTU 2-27

IND 2-27

IND SERV 2-21, 2-27

Independent Mode 2-73

Independent Service 1-8

Input Mismatch 2-52

Input Mismatch Faults 2-52

Input, Output Assignment 2-3

Input/Output Assignment 2-3, 2-7

Inputs 2-7

INSP/NORM mode 2-41

Inspect Overspeed 2-15

Inspect Slew Filter 2-16

Inspect Slew Rate 2-16

Inspection Enable 2-41

Inspection Fault Bypass 1-6, 2-18

inspection inputs 2-7

Inspection Invalid 2-73

Inspection Mode 2-42

Inspection Operation 1-5

Inspection overspeed 1-57

Inspection Speed (Fast) 2-15

Inspection Speed (Slow) 2-15

Inspection UP/DOWN 2-41

Installation Checklist 1-20

Intended direction display 1-13

Invalid Access Zone 2-73

Invalid Mode 2-73

Inventory Hall Calls 2-33

Inventory hall calls 1-40

IO Terminal Mapping Flt 2-73

IO1 - IO8 2-46

IP 2-27

IP Address 2-18

Itinerary Manager 2-19, 2-20

Itinerary manager 1-15

J

Job Department and Year 2-5

Job Info and Labels 2-5

Job Name 2-5

Job Number 2-5

JP1, CDBPTST 2-42

JP10, A/B 2-42

JP11, ENCODER INTERFACE 2-42

JP12, CAN termination 2-42

JP2, HDBPTST 2-42

JP4, FLT Bypass 2-42

JP5, PGM SOURCE 2-42

JP6, EDGE/ENCODER 2-42

JP7, EDGE/ENCODER 2-42

JP8, PGM SOURCE 2-42

JP9, ENCODER INTERFACE 2-42

Index-8 Manual # 42-02-2P26

K

KEB

Car oscillates 1-52

Car overshoots 1-52

Contract Speed 1-49

Drive response 1-47

Initial Speed Calibration 1-26

Speed changes felt excessively 1-52

KEB Setup Overview 1-24

L

L24V 2-45

Landing System 1-14, 2-19, 2-32

Landing System ID 2-10

Landing System Learn 1-10, 1-46, 2-18

Landing System Type 2-5

Landing System Utilities 1-14, 2-18

Landing System View 2-18

lanterns 1-43

Latch Door Close 2-7

Latch Door Open 2-7

Lead/Acid Batteries 3-2

Learn Modes

Landing System Learn 1-10

Terminal Switch Learn 1-10

Learn modes 1-10

Learn Operation

Repeat if S-Curve adjusted 1-10

Level Distance 2-15

Level Overspeed 2-15

Level Speed 2-15

Leveling Overspeed 2-73

Leveling speed 1-49

light load antinuisance 2-74

LLI 2-27

Light Load Input 1-44

LLI Antinuisance 2-6, 2-74

LOAD DISP 2-21

Load Disp 1-44

LOAD HEAVY 2-21

Load Heavy 1-44

Load Hvy 1-44

LOAD LIGHT 2-21

Load Light Input 1-44

load light input active 2-6

LOAD OVER 2-21

Load Over 1-44

LOAD OVER2 2-21

Load Ovr 1-44

Load Ovr2 1-44 load weighers 1-44

Lobby Call Timer 2-8, 2-9

Lobby Floor 2-5

LOCKS 1-12

Logical position display 1-13

LOP 2-27

LOPM 2-27, 2-46, 2-50

LOT 2-27

LS-EDGE

Access Ovrspd 2-74

ETS Ovrspd 2-74

Inspect Ovrspd 2-75

SPA is Offline 2-74

SPB is Offline 2-74

LS-EDGE Boot Correction 2-74

LS-EDGE Boot with Error 2-74

LS-EDGE Count Error 2-74

LS-EDGE Floor Checksum 2-74

LS-EDGE Learn Active 2-74

LS-Edge Position Error 2-74

M

M2L is Low 2-75

M2MV is Low 2-75

Machine Rm Inspection 1-19

Machine Room Construct 2-75

Machine Room Enable 1-19

Machine Room Inspection 2-41

Magnetek

Car oscillates 1-52

Car overshoots 1-52

Contract Speed 1-49

Drive response 1-47

Drive response adjustment 1-47

Initial Speed Calibration 1-26

Speed change felt excessively 1-52

MAIN CLOCK 2-27

Main CPI IO’s 2-19

Main Fire Recall Floor 2-5

Maint. Stats Cleared 2-75

Maintenance

Controller, bi-annual 3-3

Controller, monthly 3-2

Controller, yearly 3-4

Hydraulic Auxiliary Power Supply 3-10

Intervals 3-1

Smartraq door operator 3-5

Maintenance Control Plan 3-1 maintenance intervals 3-1

Maintenance Statistics 1-16, 2-20, 2-33

Manual Acceleration 2-14

Manual Deceleration 2-14

Manual Roll Jerk 2-14

Manual Start Jerk 2-14

Manual Stop Jerk 2-14

MBRE 2-27

MC-CPI (n) is Offline 2-75

MC-CPI board 1-41

MC-CPI-2 1-18, 1-41, 2-27, 2-35

MCE SmarTraq 1-2

MCE Traction Auxiliary Power Supply 1-9

MCE Universal 1-2

MDRE 2-27

MDRE Failed to Turn Off 2-75

MDRE Failed to Turn On 2-75

MEB1 2 2-27

MEB1 Failed to Turn Off 2-75

MEB1 Failed to Turn On 2-75

MEB2 Failed to Turn Off 2-76

MEB2 Failed to Turn On 2-76

MEB2 Redundancy Flt 2-76

MEB3 2-27

MEB3 Failed to Turn Off 2-76

MEB3 Failed to Turn On 2-76

MEB3/4 Redundancy Fault 2-76

MEB4 Failed to Turn Off 2-76

MEB4 Failed to Turn On 2-76

Menu tree 2-4

micro-SDRAM card 2-81

Microsoft Word 2-91

middle door lock string 2-61

Mismatch Input 2-52

MLT 2-27

Motion IO 1-14, 2-19, 2-32

Motor Contactor power 2-48

Motor Contactor Proofing Test 1-54

Motor Time Limit 2-8

Motor Time Out Shutdown 2-76

MPME 2-27

MPSBR 2-27

MPSBR Failed to Turn Off 2-77

MPSBR Failed to Turn On 2-77

MR Inspection 2-75

MRDN 2-27

MREN 2-27

MRIN 2-27

MRINO 2-27

MRUP 2-27

MSAF 2-27

MSAF input Failure 2-77

MSAF Is High 2-77

MSAF is Low 2-77

N

NDF 2-49

NDF OUT 2-27

NEC 250, earth ground 1-20

NEC, U.S. 1-5

Network Settings 1-14, 2-18

Next destination display 1-13

No Door Zone Fault 2-77

No Leveling Fault 2-77

NOT USED 2-21, 2-22, 2-23

NTS1 Lower overspeed 1-59

NTS1 Upper overspeed 1-59

NTS2 Lower overspeed 1-59

NTS2 Upper overspeed 1-59

NUDG 2-23, 2-27

NUDG BUZER 2-23, 2-27

Nudging 2-78

Nudging Front 2-49

Nudging Sense 2-6

Number of Cars 2-5

numeric entry screen 2-2

Index-9

O

OBD 1-11, 2-2

oil tank temp shutdown 2-45

On Board Display 1-11

On/Off status of dedicated inputs 2-19

On/Off status of dedicated outputs. 2-19

On/Off status of door control inputs/outputs 2-19

On/Off status of landing system inputs/outputs 2-19

On/Off status of programmable inputs 2-19

On/Off status of programmable outputs 2-19

Open Doors 2-17

Open Limit Time 2-8

Orange event text = Error 2-19

oscilloscope 2-33

Other Car Settings 1-16, 2-20

Out of Service 2-78

Outputs 2-7

Overlay 2-17

Overload 2-78

Overload 2 2-72, 2-78

OVL

Overload Input 1-44

P

paper insulator 2-41

Parameter Range Fit 2-78

Parameter Selection Screen 2-3

Parameter Storage Fault 2-78

Park at Secured Floor 2-17

Parking Timer 2-9

passcode 1-1, 1-60, 2-5

Passcode Enabled 2-78

Passenger Mode 2-78

Passenger mode 1-8

PFG 2-27

PFG ENABL 2-21

PHE 2-22, 2-27

PHE Antinuis. Disabled 2-78

PHE Antinuisance 2-6, 2-78

PHE Bypass 2-79

PHE C 2-22

PHE CUT 2-22

PHE Fail 2-79

PHE Shortens CCT 2-6 photo eye 2-6, 2-7, 2-9

physical switches 1-50

PICK_ONLY 1-25

PIT FLOOD 2-22

Pit Flood 1-6

PLD 2-27, 2-79

Aux Safety Low 2-79

Main Safety Low 2-79

PLD & Processor Resets 2-41

PLD Diagnostics Tree 2-32

PLD Flagg 2-19

PLD Inputs 2-19

PLD Numeric 2-19

PLD Outputs 2-19

PLD Read Error 2-83

Index-10 Manual # 42-02-2P26

PLD RX Communication 2-79

PLD RX Message 2-79

PLD TX Communication 2-79

PLD TX Message 2-79

PLD Write Fault (Edge) 2-79

PM 2-48

PM Failed to Turn Off 2-79

PM Failed to Turn On 2-79

PME 2-27

PMEB 2-27

PMEP 2-27

PMP 2-27, 2-46

PMP Failed to Turn Off 2-79

PMP Failed to Turn On 2-80

Pollution 1-5

position indicators 1-43

Positioning 2-80

Power Input 1-3, 1-5

Pref Car to Run on EP2 2-17

Pre-Open Doors 2-6

Pretest 1-5, 1-19, 2-41

Primary Dispatcher 1-53, 2-15

Primary motor contactor 2-46

Primary Parking Door Operation 2-5

Primary Parking Floor 2-5

Processing Car Calls 2-80

Profile Advance 1-48, 2-15

Profile Scale 2-15

profile transitions 2-12, 2-13

Programmable input 2-45

Programmable Input/Outputs 2-46

Programmed Inputs 2-19, 2-32

Programmed Outputs 2-19, 2-32

Proximity Distance 2-15

PSN 2-27

PTI 2-22, 2-27

PTI C 2-22

PTI Recall 2-80

PTI Shutdown 2-80

Q

Quad Sensor Loss 2-80

Quadrature 2-45

Quadrature Loss CH-B 2-80

Quadrature Offset CH-B 2-80

R

R2 2-22

Recall

Car Calls Dispensation 2-17

Door Operation 2-17

Latch Switch 2-17

Override Independent 2-17

Override Security 2-17

Recall Floor 2-17

Recall 1 (2, 3, or 4) Done 2-81

Recall 1 Floor 2-6

Recall Complete 2-80

Recall On Switch ‘n’ 2-81

RECALL S1 2-22

RECALL S2 2-22

RECALL S3 2-22

RECALL S4 2-22

Recall Sw

Bypassed 2-81

Recall Switch 2-22

Recall Switch ‘n’ (1, 2, 3, or 4) 2-81

Recall Switches 1-14

Recalling 2-81

Recommended Terminal Switch Configuration 1-50, 1-58 reduced stroke buffers 1-50, 1-58

Redundancy Faults 2-52, 2-53

Relevel Distance 2-15

Relevel Operation 1-46

Remote Calls Override Sec 2-17

Repeat learn operation 1-10

Restore Backup Settings 1-14, 2-29

Restore Factory Settings 1-14

Restricted Operation 2-81

RG 2-48

RGOK 2-28, 2-45

Ride Quality 1-51

Riser Assignment 1-39

Roll Jerk 2-12

Rope Gripper 2-48

Rope Gripper OK 2-45

RSTA 1-19

RSTB 1-19

RSTC 1-19

RSTP 1-19

run-related statistics 2-33

S

SAF EDGE C 2-22

SAFA 2-28

SAFB 2-28

SAFB.P 2-28

SAFC 1-22, 1-54, 2-48, 2-49

SAFC.P 2-28

SAFCT 2-28

SAFE EDGE 2-22

SAFETY 1-12

Safety 1-4, 1-5

safety edge 2-9

Safety String Test 1-54

SAFETY TESTS 1-56

Safety Tests 2-18

SAFH 1-54, 2-48

SAFH Input Low 2-81

SAFH.B 2-28

SAFP 2-28

SANE(x) 2-28

Save button 2-2

save parameters 1-11

Saving Dispatch Params 2-81

Saving Other Car Params 2-81

SC-3HN 1-18, 1-38, 2-23

SC-3HN addresses 1-39

SCE-BRK 1-3

SCE-CON 1-18, 2-28, 2-38

SCE-CON Connector Assignments 2-38

SCE-CPU 1-3, 1-19, 2-30, 2-40

SCE-CPU Battery 2-41

SCE-CPU Jumpers 2-42

SCE-HVI 1-3, 2-47

SCE-UPD 1-3, 1-21, 2-50

Scope 2-20, 2-33

Screen freeze 2-2

S-Curve 1-48, 2-12

SD card 2-30

SD Card Error 2-81

SD MICRO 2-46

SE 2-28

SE Bypass 2-82

SE Bypass Timer 2-9

SE Fail 2-82

Secondary Parking Door Operation 2-5

Secondary Parking Floor 2-5

SECRTY OV 2-22

Secure Independent 2-17

Security CC Enable Active Off 2-17

Security Disabled 2-82

Security Enabled 2-17

Select From Landing System Signals 2-20

Select From Programmed Inputs 2-20

Select From Programmed Outputs 2-20

Select From System Inputs 2-20

Select From System Outputs 2-20

Selective Collective 1-5

serial hall calls 1-38

SERV IN 2-23

SERV OUT 2-23

Set time and date 2-18

SHLD 2-28

Short Door Timer 2-8

Shortcuts 2-4

Shorts to Ground 1-21

SHUTDOWN 2-23

Simplex 1-5, 1-13

Sleep Mode Timer 2-9

Slew Rate 2-16

SmarTraq Door Operator 3-5

Smartraq Door Operator maintenance 3-5

SMI 2-22, 2-28, 2-87

Smoothing tape edges 1-28

Index-11

Software update 2-43

Software version 2-20

SPA 2-28

DETS Position High 2-82

DETS Position Low 2-82

LS-EDGE is Offline 2-82

Motion Shutdown 2-82

PLD Osc Stopped 2-82

PLD Read Error 2-83

SPC is Offline 2-83

UETS Position High 2-83

UETS Position Low 2-83

UETS Speed High 2-83

SPA Door Dwell Times 2-19

SPA Flags 2-19

SPA Motion Numeric 1-15, 2-19

SPA Numeric 1-15, 2-19

SPA, SPB, SPC, PLD Diagnostics 2-32

Spare I/O Assignment 2-7

Spare Inputs 2-7

Spare Outputs 2-7

SPB 2-28

DETS Position High 2-84

DETS Position Low 2-84

DETS Speed High 2-82, 2-84

Inspect Ovrspd 2-84

LS-EDGE is Offline 2-84

Parameter Update 2-84

SPA Comm Sync 2-84

SPA Heartbeat 2-84

SPA is Offline 2-84

SPC Comm Sync 2-84

SPC is Offline 2-85

UETS Position High 2-85

UETS Position Low 2-85

UETS Speed High 2-85

SPB Flags 2-19

SPB Inputs 2-19

SPB is Offline 2-83

SPB Numeric 2-19

SPB Outputs 2-19

SPB Powerup/Reset 2-83

SPC 2-28

3HN Comm Loss 2-85

CAN 3 Comm Loss 2-85

CAN Comm Loss 2-85

SPA is Offline 2-86

SPB is Offline 2-86

SPC Flags 2-19

SPC Inputs 2-19

SPC Numeric 2-19

SPC Outputs 2-19

SPC Started Up 2-85

SPD(n) 2-28

Speed and Acceleration Control 1-43

Speed Changes Felt Excessively in Car 1-52

Speed display 1-13

Speed Drop Delay 2-16

Speed Pick Delay 2-16

speed pick delay 1-45

Index-12 Manual # 42-02-2P26

SPI 2-28

Standard Acceleration 2-12

Standard Deceleration 2-13

Standard enclosure 1-3

Standard Roll Jerk 2-12

Standard Start Jerk 2-12

Standard Stop Jerk 2-12

Start Jerk 2-12

Status Info 2-33

Status Information 1-13

status information 2-5

status of dedicated inputs 2-19 status of dedicated outputs 2-19 status of door control inputs/outputs 2-19 status of landing system inputs/outputs 2-19 status of programmable inputs 2-19 status of programmable outputs 2-19

STD 2-22, 2-28

Steel tape 1-28

Stick alignment 1-31

Stop Jerk 2-12

Stopping Accuracy 3-2

STU 2-22, 2-28

Stuck Car Call 2-86

Stuck Door Zone Fault 2-86

Stuck Down Hall Call 2-86

Stuck Insp Input 2-7

Stuck Leveling Fault 2-86

Stuck PHE Timer 2-9

Stuck Photo Eye 2-86

Stuck Safe Edge 2-87

Stuck Sensor (Edge) 2-87

Stuck Up Hall Call 2-87

Subnet Mask 2-18

Supported Door Operators 1-2

Suspension Integrity Fault 2-87

Suspension Means Integrity fault 2-87

SW5 2-43

System Control Parameters 2-15, 2-16

System Inputs 2-19, 2-32

System Outputs 2-19, 2-32

System Timers 2-8, 2-9

T

Tape cleaning 1-28

Tape Tension 1-30

TAPS 1-9, 2-28

TAPS Testing 3-12

Temperature 1-5

Terminal Switch Configuration 1-27

Terminal Switch Learn 1-10, 1-51, 2-87

Terminal Sync (Edge) 2-87

terminate the CAN 2-36

TEST 2-28

Test 1-5

Test Hall Calls 2-33

Test hall calls 1-40

Test Mode 1-9, 2-87

Test mode 2-41

Test speed 1-56

Test Type 1-56

TEST/PRETEST 2-41

Test/Pretest 1-19, 2-41

Thermal overload 2-45

Top Access Distance 2-10

Top Access, DOWN 2-45

Top Access, UP 2-45

Top Deviation (Edge) 2-87

Top Floor 2-5

Touch screen locks up 2-2 touchscreen 2-2

TP1 2-49

TP2LS 2-49

TPEB3 2-49

TPEB34 2-49

TPEB4 2-49

TPMSAF 2-49

TR_HY 2-46, 2-57

TRACTION 2-28

Traction Auxiliary Power Supply Testing 3-12

Traction Loss 2-87

Traction/Hydro default determination 2-46

Troubleshooting example 2-52

U

U/DETS Option 2-11

U/DETS-LS Option 2-11

U/DETS-LS Overspeed 2-11

U/DSL1 Option 2-14

U/DSL2 Option 2-10

U/DTL Distance 2-10

U/DTL Limit Option 2-10

UCF 2-28

UETS 2-28, 2-48

UETS Delta Distance 2-11

UETS Delta Speed 2-11

UETS Distance 2-11

UETS Speed 2-11

UETS switch 2-11

UFE/PM 2-48

UFE/PM Stuck Off 2-88

UFE/PM Stuck On 2-88

UIM 2-28

UIM RST 1-19, 2-28

UIMR 2-28

UL508C 1-5

ULM 2-22, 2-28

Undo 2-2

Unintended Motion 1-55, 2-16

Unintended Motion Reset 2-41

Unknown Fault 2-88

Up Emergency Terminal Switch 2-11

Up Emergency Terminal Switch input 2-48

Up Fast Enable output 2-48

Up Slow Enable output 2-48

Up Slow Limit 1 input 2-48

Up Slow Limit 2 input 2-48

Up Terminal Limit input 2-48

USB 2-28, 2-46

USB drive 2-29

USB Drive Inserted 2-88

USB Drive Removed 2-88

uSD 2-28

USE/BR 2-48

USE/BR Stuck Off 2-88

USE/BR Stuck On 2-88

User Defaults 2-18

USL and DSL Low 2-89

USL1 2-48

USL1 Delta Distance 2-14

USL1 Delta-H Speed 2-14

USL1 Delta-L Speed 2-14

USL1 Distance 2-14

USL1 is Low 2-88

USL1 Position High 2-88

USL1 Position Low 2-88

USL1 Speed 2-14

USL1 Speed High-Lower 2-88, 2-89

USL1 Speed High-Upper 2-88, 2-89

USL1/USL2 Mismatch 2-89

USL2 2-48

USL2 Delta Distance 2-10

USL2 Delta-H Speed 2-10

USL2 Delta-L Speed 2-10

USL2 Distance 2-10

USL2 Position High 2-89

USL2 Position Low 2-89

USL2 Speed 2-10

USLx 2-28

UTILS menu 2-18

UTILS, Safety Test 1-54

UTL 2-28, 2-48

UTL and DSLx Are Low 2-90

UTL and DTL Low 2-90

UTL Switch is Open 2-90

V

Version Information 2-20

virtual switches 1-50

W

Waiting for In-Car Sw 2-90

Warning

Faults Bypass 2-90

Wire Separation 1-21

X

X1B 2-51

X2B 2-51

XD1 2-51

XD2 2-51

XL1 2-51

XL2 2-51

Y

Yellow text = fault 2-19

Index-13

Index-14 Manual # 42-02-2P26

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents